Panasonic PT-DZ13KU Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions

Functional Manual

DLP

TM

Projector Commercial Use

Model No.

PT-DZ13KU

PT-DS12KU

PT-DW11KU

PT-DZ10KU

The projection lens is sold separately.

Thank you for purchasing this Panasonic product.

■ Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual

for future use.

■ Before using your projector, be sure to read “Read this first!” (x pages 2 to 9).

ENGLISH

TQBJ0521

Read this first!


WARNING: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DONOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT

TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product.

CAUTION: This equipment is equipped with a three-pin grounding-type power plug. Do not remove the grounding pin on the power plug. This plug will only fit a grounding-type power outlet. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, contact an electrician.

Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding plug.

Do not remove

2 - ENGLISH


FCC NOTICE (USA)

Verification

Model Number:

Trade Name:

PT-DZ13KU/PT-DS12KU/PT-DW11KU/PT-DZ10KU

Panasonic

Responsible Party: Panasonic Corporation of North America

Address: One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, NJ 07094

Telephone number: (877)803-8492

E-mail: [email protected]

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

To assure continued compliance, follow the attached installation instructions and do not make any unauthorized modifications.

Caution:

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.

NOTIFICATION (Canada)

This class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

WARNING: f

Not for use in a computer room as defined in the Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data

Processing Equipment, ANSI/NFPA 75.

f

For permanently connected equipment, a readily accessible disconnect device shall be incorporated in the building installation wiring.

f

For pluggable equipment, the socket-outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible.

NOTICE USA only: f This product has a High Intensity Discharge (HID) lamp that contains mercury. Disposal may be regulated in your community due to environmental considerations. For disposal or recycling information, please visit

Panasonic website: http://www.panasonic.com/environmental or call 1-888-769-0149.

For USA-California Only

This product contains a CR Coin Cell Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

ENGLISH - 3


WARNING:

r

POWER

The wall outlet or the circuit breaker shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible when problems occur. If the following problems occur, cut off the power supply immediately.

Continued use of the projector in these conditions will result in fire or electric shock.

f If foreign objects or water get inside the projector, cut off the power supply.

f If the projector is dropped or the cabinet is broken, cut off the power supply.

f If you notice smoke, strange smells or noise coming from the projector, cut off the power supply.

Please contact an Authorized Service Center for repairs, and do not attempt to repair the projector yourself.

During a thunderstorm, do not touch the projector or the cable.

Electric shocks can result.

Do not do anything that might damage the power cord or the power plug.

If the power cord is used while damaged, electric shocks, short-circuits or fire will result.

f Do not damage the power cord, make any modifications to it, place it near any hot objects, bend it excessively, twist it, pull it, place heavy objects on top of it or wrap it into a bundle.

Ask an Authorized Service Center to carry out any repairs to the power cord that might be necessary.

Completely insert the power plug into the wall outlet and the power connector into the projector terminal.

If the plug is not inserted correctly, electric shocks or overheating will result.

f Do not use plugs which are damaged or wall outlets which are coming loose from the wall.

Clean the power plug regularly to prevent it from becoming covered in dust.

Failure to observe this will cause a fire.

f

If dust builds up on the power plug, the resulting humidity can damage the insulation.

f

If not using the projector for an extended period of time, pull the power plug out from the wall outlet.

Pull the power plug out from the wall outlet and wipe it with a dry cloth regularly.

Do not handle the power plug and power connector with wet hands.

Failure to observe this will result in electric shocks.

Do not overload the wall outlet.

If the power supply is overloaded (ex., by using too many adapters), overheating may occur and fire will result.

r

ON USE/INSTALLATION

Do not place the projector on soft materials such as carpets or sponge mats.

Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause burns, fire or damage to the projector.

Do not set up the projector in humid or dusty places or in places where the projector may come into contact with oily smoke or steam, ex. a bathroom.

Using the projector under such conditions will result in fire, electric shocks or deterioration of components.

Deterioration of components (such as ceiling mount brackets) may cause the projector which is mounted on the ceiling to fall down.

Do not install this projector in a place which is not strong enough to take the full weight of the projector or on top of a surface which is sloped or unstable.

Failure to observe this will cause projector to fall down or tip over the projector, and severe injury or damage could result.

4 - ENGLISH


WARNING:

Do not cover the air intake/exhaust ports or place anything within 500 mm (20") of them.

Doing so will cause the projector to overheat, which can cause fire or damage to the projector.

f Do not place the projector in narrow, badly ventilated places.

f Do not place the projector on cloth or papers, as these materials could be drawn into the air intake port.

Do not place your hands or other objects close to the air exhaust port.

Doing so will cause burns or damage your hands or other objects.

f Heated air comes out of the air exhaust port. Do not place your hands or face, or objects which cannot withstand heat close to this port.

Do not look at the light emitted from the lens while the projector is being used.

Doing so can cause loss of sight.

f

Strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens. Do not directly look at this light.

f

Be especially careful not to let young children look into the lens. In addition, turn off the power and disconnect the power plug when you are away from the projector.

Never attempt to remodel or disassemble the projector.

High voltages can cause fire or electric shocks.

f For any inspection, adjustment and repair work, please contact an Authorized Service Center.

Do not project an image with the lens cover of the projection lens (optional) attached.

Doing so can cause fire.

Do not allow metal objects, flammable objects, or liquids to enter inside of the projector. Do not allow the projector to get wet.

Doing so may cause short circuits or overheating, and result in fire, electric shock, or malfunction of the projector.

f

Do not place containers of liquid or metal objects near the projector.

f

If liquid enters inside of the projector, consult your dealer.

f

Particular attention must be paid to children.

Use the ceiling mount bracket specified by Panasonic.

Using the ceiling mount bracket other than the specified one will result in falling accidents.

f Attach the supplied safety cable to the ceiling mount bracket to prevent the projector from falling down.

Installation work (such as ceiling mount bracket) should only be carried out by a qualified technician.

If installation is not carried out and secured correctly it can cause injury or accidents, such as electric shocks.

f Do not use anything other than an authorized ceiling mount bracket.

f Be sure to use the provided accessory wire with an eye bolt as an extra safety measure to prevent the projector from falling down. (Install in a different location to the ceiling mount bracket.)

ENGLISH - 5


WARNING:

r

ACCESSORIES

Do not use or handle the batteries improperly, and refer to the following.

Failure to observe this will cause burns, batteries to leak, overheat, explode or catch fire.

f Use AA/R6 batteries.

f Do not use unspecified batteries.

f Do not use chargeable batteries.

f Do not disassemble dry cell batteries.

f Do not heat the batteries or place them into water or fire.

f Do not allow the + and – terminals of the batteries to come into contact with metallic objects such as necklaces or hairpins.

f Do not store or carry batteries together with metallic objects.

f Store the batteries in a plastic bag and keep them away from metallic objects.

f Make sure the polarities (+ and –) are correct when inserting the batteries.

f Do not use a new battery together with an old battery or mix different types of batteries.

f Do not use batteries with the outer cover peeling away or removed.

If the battery fluid leaks, do not touch it with bare hands, and take the following measures if necessary.

f Battery fluid on your skin or clothing could result in skin inflammation or injury.

Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.

f Battery fluid coming in contact with your eyes could result in loss of sight.

In this case, do not rub your eyes. Rinse with clean water and seek medical advice immediately.

Do not remove unspecified screws during the lamp unit replacement.

Doing so can cause electric shocks, burns, or injury.

Do not disassemble the lamp unit.

If the lamp breaks, it could cause injury.

Lamp replacement

The lamp has high internal pressure. If improperly handled, an explosion and severe injury or accidents will result.

f

The lamp can easily explode if struck against hard objects or dropped.

f

Before replacing the lamp unit, be sure to turn the power off and to disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.

Electric shocks or explosions can result if this is not done.

f

When replacing the lamp unit, turn the power off and allow the lamp to cool for at least one hour before handling it otherwise it can cause burns.

Do not use the supplied power cord with devices other than this projector.

f Using the supplied power cord with devices other than this projector may cause short circuits or overheating, and result in electric shock or fire.

Keep accessories (screws) out of the reach of small children.

Accidentally swallowing them can cause physical harm. f If you believe that parts have been swallowed, seek medical advice immediately.

Remove the depleted batteries from the remote control promptly.

f

Leaving them in the unit may result in fluid leakage, overheating, or explosion of the batteries.

6 - ENGLISH


CAUTION:

r

POWER

When disconnecting the power cord, be sure to hold the power plug and power connector.

If the power cord itself is pulled, the lead will become damaged, and fire, short-circuits or serious electric shocks will result.

When not using the projector for an extended period of time, disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.

Failure to do so may result in fire or electric shock.

Disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet before carrying out any cleaning and replacing the unit.

Failure to do so may result in electric shock.

r

ON USE/INSTALLATION

Do not place heavy objects on top of the projector.

Failure to observe this will cause the projector to become unbalanced and fall, which could result in damage or injury. The projector will be damaged or deformed.

Do not put your weight on this projector.

You could fall or the projector could break, and injury will result.

f Be especially careful not to let young children stand or sit on the projector.

Do not place the projector in extremely hot locations.

Doing so will cause the outer casing or internal components to deteriorate, or result in fire.

f

Take particular care in locations exposed to direct sunlight or near stoves.

Do not place your hands in the openings beside the optical lens, while shifting the lens.

Failure to observe this could cause injury.

Do not stand in front of the lens while the projector is being used.

Doing so can cause damage and burns to clothing.

f Extremely strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.

Do not place objects in front of the lens while the projector is being used.

Doing so can cause damage to the object and can cause the set to malfunction.

f Extremely strong light is emitted from the projector’s lens.

Always disconnect all cables before moving the projector.

Moving the projector with cables still attached can damage the cables, which will cause fire or electric shocks to occur.

When mounting the projector on the ceiling, keep mounting screws and power cord from contact with metal parts inside the ceiling.

Contact with metal parts inside the ceiling can cause electric shocks.

r

ACCESSORIES

Do not use the old lamp unit.

If used it could cause lamp explosion.

If the lamp has broken, ventilate the room immediately. Do not touch or bring your face close to the broken pieces.

Failure to observe this will cause the user to absorb the gas which was released when the lamp broke and which contains nearly the same amount of mercury as fluorescent lamps, and the broken pieces will cause injury.

f If you believe that you have absorbed the gas or that the gas has got into your eyes or mouth, seek medical advice immediately.

f Ask your dealer about replacing the lamp unit and check the inside of the projector.

When not using the projector for an extended period of time, remove the batteries from the remote control.

Failure to observe this will cause the batteries to leak, overheat, catch fire or explode, which may result in fire or contamination of surrounding area.

ENGLISH - 7


CAUTION:

r

MAINTENANCE

Do not attach the air filter unit while it is wet.

Doing so may result in electric shock or malfunctions.

f After you clean the air filter units, dry them thoroughly before reattaching them.

Do not touch the fan with your fingers or any other parts of your body when replacing the lamp unit.

Doing so can cause injury.

Ask your dealer about cleaning inside the projector once a year.

Continuous use while dust is accumulated inside the projector may result in fire.

f For cleaning fee, ask your dealer.

r

VIEWING 3D VIDEO (PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, and PT-DW11KU only)

Those with a medical history of oversensitivity to light, heart problems, or poor physical health should not view 3D images.

This may lead to a worsening of medical conditions.

If you feel tiredness or discomfort, or other abnormality while viewing with 3D Eyewear, discontinue viewing.

Continuing use may cause health problems. Take a break as necessary.

When viewing 3D movies, aim to view one movie at a time and take a break as necessary.

When viewing 3D images, for example when playing 3D games or using a PC where two way interaction is possible, take an appropriate break every 30 to 60 minutes.

Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue.

When preparing contents, use contents properly created to be used for 3D.

This may cause eye fatigue or health problems.

When viewing 3D images, pay attention to people and objects in the vicinity.

3D video may be mistaken for actual objects, and the related bodily movements can cause damage to objects and lead to injury.

Use 3D Eyewear when viewing 3D videos.

Do not tilt your head when viewing with 3D Eyewear.

Those who are near or far sighted, those with weaker eyesight in one eye, or those with astigmatism should use corrective glasses etc. when using 3D Eyewear.

If the image appears distinctly double when viewing 3D video, discontinue viewing.

Watching for long periods of time may cause eye fatigue.

View at a distance of at least three times the effective height of the screen.

Viewing at distance closer than the recommended distance may cause eye fatigue. As with movies, if there are black bands at the top and bottom of the video, view at a distance of 3 times or more of the height of the video section.

Children younger than 5 or 6 years old should not use 3D Eyewear.

As it is difficult to gauge the reactions of children to fatigue and discomfort their condition may worsen suddenly.

If a child uses the 3D Eyewear, guardians should beware of the child’s eyes becoming tired.

8 - ENGLISH


Brazil Only

Brasil Apenas

r

Manuseio de baterias usadas

BRASIL

Após o uso, as pilhas e/ou baterias deverão ser entregues ao estabelecimento comercial ou rede de assistência técnica autorizada.

Cobrir os terminais positivo (+) e negativo (-) com uma fita isolante adesiva, antes de depositar numa caixa destinada para o recolhimento. O contato entre partes metálicas pode causar vazamentos, gerar calor, romper a blindagem e produzir fogo. (Fig. 1)

Fig. 1

Como isolar os terminais

Fita Isolante

Fita Isolante

Não desmonte, não remova o invólucro, nem amasse a bateria. O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a garganta, danificar o lacre do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo devido ao curto circuito dos terminais. Não incinere nem aqueça as baterias, elas não podem ficar expostas a temperaturas superiores a 100 °C (212 °F). O gás liberado pela bateria pode irritar a garganta, danificar o lacre do invólucro ou o vazamento provocar calor, ruptura da blindagem e produzir fogo devido ao curto circuito dos terminais provocado internamente.

Evite o contato com o liquido que vazar das baterias. Caso isto ocorra, lave bem a parte afetada com bastante

água. Caso haja irritação, consulte um médico.

r

Remoção das baterias

1. Pressione a guia e levante a tampa.

(ii)

2. Remova as baterias.

(i)

ENGLISH - 9

r

Trademarks

f Windows ® , Windows Vista ® , and Internet Explorer ® are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the

United States and other countries.

f Mac, Mac OS, OS X, and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the United States and other countries.

f PJLink TM is a registered trademark or pending trademark in Japan, the United States, and other countries and regions.

f HDMI, the HDMI Logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing

LLC in the United States and other countries.

f VGA and XGA are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States.

f SVGA is a trademark or registered trademark of Video Electronics Standards Association.

f RoomView and Crestron RoomView are registered trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc.

Crestron Connected and Fusion RV are trademarks of Crestron Electronics, Inc.

f Adobe Flash Player is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Inc. in the United Stated and/or other countries.

f RealD 3D is a trademark of RealD Inc.

f Some of the fonts used in the on-screen menu are Ricoh bitmap fonts, which are manufactured and sold by Ricoh Company,

Ltd.

f All other names, company names, and product names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.

Please note that the ® and TM symbols are not specified in this manual.

r

Illustrations in this manual

f Illustrations of the projector, screen, and other parts may vary from the actual product.

r

Reference pages

f Reference pages in this manual are indicated as (x page 00).

r

Term

f In this manual, the “Wireless/wired remote control unit” accessory is referred to as “Remote control”.

10 - ENGLISH

Features of the Projector Quick Steps

High luminance and high color reproduction

▶ High luminance and high color reproduction are achieved with a small size by means of a unique optical system and lamp drive system.

For details, refer to the corresponding pages.

1. Set up the projector.

(x page 31)

2. Attach the projection lens

(optional).

(x page 46)

Easy setup and improved serviceability

▶ In addition to the extensive lineup of optional lenses that allows more flexible setup of the projector, “portrait mode” is supported.

3. Connect with external devices.

(x page 48)

4. Connect the power cord.

(x page 52)

Improved cost performance in maintenance fee

▶ The extended-life filter reduces maintenance costs.

5. Switch on the projector.

(x page 53)

6. Make initial settings.

(x page 22)

f Take this step when you switch on the power for the first time after purchasing the projector.

7. Select the input signal.

(x page 56)

8. Adjust the image.

(x page 56)

ENGLISH - 11

Contents

Contents

Be sure to read “Read this first!” from page 2.

Chapter 1 Preparation

Software information regarding this product 19

22

22

16

16

Adjustment range by the lens position shift

57

Adjusting the lens mounter when the focus is

58

61

61

Chapter 4 Settings

65

65

Chapter 2 Getting Started

31

31

Attaching/removing the projection lens

46

Chapter 3 Basic Operations

12 - ENGLISH

Contents

90

90

[3D SETTINGS] menu

[3D SYSTEM SETTING] 118

127

127

128

128

131

131

[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]

133

ENGLISH - 13

Contents

Chapter 5 Maintenance

155

155

157

Before performing maintenance/replacement 157

Chapter 6 Appendix

Precautions for Ceiling Mount Bracket for

184

14 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1 Preparation

This chapter describes things you need to know or check before using the projector.

ENGLISH - 15

Chapter 1 Preparation — Precautions for use

Precautions for use

Cautions when transporting

f The projection lens (optional) is susceptible to effects due to vibration or impact. Make sure to remove the lens when transporting.

f When transporting the projector, hold it securely by its bottom and avoid excessive vibration and impacts. They may damage the internal components and result in malfunctions.

f Do not transport the projector with the adjustable feet extended. Doing so may damage the adjustable feet.

Cautions when installing

r

After removing the projection lens (optional), attach the dust sponge included with the projector.

Otherwise dust will accumulate inside and may cause malfunctions.

r

Do not set up the projector outdoors.

The projector is designed for indoor use only.

r

Do not set up the projector in the following locations.

f Places where vibration and impacts occur such as in a car or vehicle: Doing so may cause damage to internal components or malfunction.

f Near the exhaust of an air conditioner: Depending on the conditions of use, the screen may fluctuate in rare cases due to the heated air from the air exhaust port or the hot or cooled air. Make sure that the exhaust from the projector or other equipment, or the air from the air conditioner does not blow toward the front of the projector.

f Places with sharp temperature fluctuations such as near lights (studio lamps): Doing so may shorten the life of the lamp, or result in deformation of the outer case due to heat, which may cause malfunctions.

The operating environment temperature of the projector should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 45 °C (113 °F) when using it at elevations lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level, and between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F) when using it at high altitudes (1 400 m (4 593') or higher – lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level).

If you use the Smoke cut filter, the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 35 °C (95 °F).

However, it cannot be used at high altitudes.

If you use the Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode), the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C

(32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F) when using the projector at elevations lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level, and between

0 °C (32 °F) and 35 °C (95 °F) when using the projector at high altitudes. If you use the Smoke cut filter together, the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 30 °C (86 °F).

f Near high-voltage power lines or near motors: Doing so may interfere with the operation of the projector.

f Places where there is high-power laser equipment: Directing a laser beam onto the lens surface causes damage to the DLP chips.

r

Be sure to ask a specialized technician or your dealer when installing the projector on a ceiling.

The optional Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors is required.

Model No.: ET-PKD310H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD310S (for Low Ceilings) r

Lens focus

The high clarity projection lens is thermally affected by the light from the light source, making the focus unstable in the period just after switching on the power. Wait at least 30 minutes with the image projected before adjusting the lens focus.

r

Make sure to set [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] to [ON] when using the projector at elevations between 1 400 m (4 593') or higher and lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level.

Failure to do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions.

r

Make sure to set [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] to [OFF] when using the projector at elevations lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level.

Failure to do so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions.

r

Do not install the projector at elevations of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.

Doing so may shorten the life of the components and result in malfunctions.

16 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1 Preparation — Precautions for use r

Do not use the projector tilted to the right or left.

Using the projector at a vertical angle that exceeds 15° may reduce product life or result in malfunction.

r

When installing and using the projector at an angle that exceeds 30° vertically, set

[COOLING CONDITION] (x page 109).

Failure to observe this may shorten the life of the components or result in malfunctions.

r

When using the Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode), install the projector with the terminals surface facing down.

Do not use the projector tilted to the right and left, front and back. Using the projector at an angle that exceeds 15° in either direction may reduce the life of the components or result in malfunctions.

r

Cautions when setting up the projector

f When installing and using the projector with a method other than the floor standing installation using the adjustable feet, fix the projector using the five screw holes for ceiling mount (as shown in the figure).

(Screw diameter: M6, tapping depth inside the set: 16 mm (5/8"), torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m) f Make a clearance of at least 5 mm (3/16") between the projector bottom and the setting surface by inserting spacers

(metallic) between them.

Adjustable feet

Mount

Spacer

Screw holes for ceiling mount

(M6)

Adjustable feet

The positions of screw holes for ceiling mount and adjustable feet

Clearance (5 mm (3/16") or longer)

Ensure the inflow of air into the air intake port. Otherwise the projector may not work properly.

f The adjustable feet can be removed if not needed in the installation. However, do not use the screw holes where the adjustable feet were removed to fix the projector in place.

Also, do not install other screws in the screw holes of adjustable feet. Doing so may damage the projector.

Note that the length of the front feet differ from that of the rear feet when attaching the removed adjustable feet. The ones with a longer screw are for the front. (Length of the screw for front feet: 65 mm (2-9/16"), length of the screw for rear feet:

23 mm (29/32")) f Use the adjustable feet only for the floor standing installation and for adjusting the angle. Using them for other purposes may damage the projector.

f Do not stack projectors on top of each other.

f Do not use the projector supporting it by the top.

f Do not use the projector tilted at an angle that exceeds ±15° from the horizontal plane.

f Do not block the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector.

ENGLISH - 17

Chapter 1 Preparation — Precautions for use f Prevent hot and cool air from the air conditioning system to blow directly to the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector.

SDI 1/2

SDI 1/2

500 mm (20") or longer 500 mm (20") or longer

+15°

-15°

500 mm (20") or longer

SDI 1/2

SDI 1/2

100 mm (4") or longer f Do not install the projector in a confined space.

When it is necessary to install the projector in a confined space, install the air conditioning or ventilation separately. Exhaust heat may accumulate when the ventilation is not enough, triggering the protection circuit of the projector.

Security

When using this product, take safety measures against the following incidents.

f Personal information being leaked via this product f Unauthorized operation of this product by a malicious third party f Interfering or stopping of this product by a malicious third party

Take sufficient security measures. (x pages 131, 150) f Make your password difficult to guess as much as possible.

f Change your password periodically.

f Panasonic Corporation or its affiliate companies will never ask for your password directly. Do not divulge your password in case you receive such inquiries.

f The connecting network must be secured by a firewall, etc.

f Set a password for the web control and restrict the users who can log in.

Disposal

To dispose of the product, ask your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal.

The lamp contains mercury. When disposing of used lamp units, contact your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal.

Cautions on use

r

To get a good picture quality

In order to view a beautiful image in higher contrast, prepare an appropriate environment. Draw curtains or blinds over windows and turn off any lights near the screen to prevent outside light or light from indoor lamps from shining onto the screen.

r

Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.

If the surface of the projection lens becomes dirty from fingerprints or anything else, this will be magnified and projected onto the screen.

Attach the supplied lens cover to the projection lens when you do not use the projector.

r

DLP chips

f The DLP chips are precision-made. Note that in rare cases, pixels of high precision could be missing or always lit. Note that such phenomena does not indicate malfunction.

18 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1 Preparation — Precautions for use f Directing a high-power laser beam onto the lens surface can damage the DLP chips.

r

Do not move the projector or subject it to vibration or impact while it is operating.

Doing so may shorten the life of the built-in motor.

r

Lamp

The light source of the projector is a high-pressure mercury lamp.

A high-pressure mercury lamp has the following characteristics.

f The luminance of the lamp will decrease by duration of usage.

f The lamp may burst with a loud sound or have its service life shortened because of shock, chipping, or degradation due to cumulative runtime.

f The lamp life varies greatly depending on individual differences and usage conditions. In particular, frequent on/off switching of the power greatly deteriorate the lamp and affects the lamp life.

f Continuous use for over one week will deteriorate the lamp. The degradation of the lamp due to continuous use can be reduced by using the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LAMP RELAY].

f In rare cases, the lamps burst shortly after projection starts.

f The risk of bursting increases when the lamp is used beyond its replacement cycle. Make sure to replace the lamp unit regularly.

(“When to replace the lamp unit” (x page 160), “How to replace the lamp unit” (x page 161)) f If the lamp bursts, gas contained inside of the lamp is released in the form of smoke.

f It is recommended that you store the Replacement lamp unit as a contingency.

r

Computer and external device connections

f When connecting a computer or an external device, read this manual carefully regarding the use of power cords and shielded cables as well.

f Use a commercial cable with a ferrite core for connecting with the <DVI-D IN> terminal.

r

Viewing 3D images

(Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU)

The projector can display 3D video signals that are input through various systems such as “frame packing” and “side by side”.

You are required to prepare external devices for viewing 3D images (such as 3D eyewear, video signal output devices) which are suitable for your 3D system. For connections of the projector and external devices, they are different depends on the 3D system to be used, see the operating instructions of external devices you use.

Refer to “List of 3D compatible signals” (x page 177) for the types of 3D video signals that can be used with the projector.

Software information regarding this product

© Panasonic Corporation 2013

This product is equipped with the following software:

(1) Software which is developed independently by or for Panasonic Corporation

(2) Software which is licensed under GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

(3) Software which is licensed under GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE

For license conditions related to software in (2) and (3), refer to the provisions of the software licenses (GNU GENERAL

PUBLIC LICENSE and GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE) in the supplied CD-ROM. (Those provisions are written in English because they have been stipulated by third parties.)

If you have any questions regarding the software, please contact us via email ([email protected]).

ENGLISH - 19


Accessories

Make sure that the following accessories are provided with your projector. Numbers enclosed in < > show the number of accessories.

Wireless/wired remote control unit <1>

(N2QAYB000769)

CD-ROM <1>

(TXFQB02VLF9)

AA/R6 battery <2>

Power cord <1>

(TXFSX01RGQZ)

(For remote control unit)

Lens fixing screw <1>

(XYN4+J18FJ)

Attention f After unpacking the projector, discard the power cord cap and packaging material properly.

f Do not use the supplied power cord for devices other than this projector.

f For missing accessories, consult your dealer.

f Store small parts in an appropriate manner, and keep them away from small children.

Note f The model numbers of accessories are subject to change without prior notice.

Contents of the supplied CD-ROM

The contents of the supplied CD-ROM are as follows.

Instruction/list (PDF)

Software

Operating Instructions – Functional Manual

Multi Projector Monitoring & Control Software Operating Instructions

Logo Transfer Software Operating Instructions

List of Compatible Projector

Models

Software license

This is a list of projectors that are compatible with the software contained in the CD-ROM and their restrictions.

GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE, GNU LESSER GENERAL

PUBLIC LICENSE

Multi Projector Monitoring &

Control Software (Windows)

Logo Transfer Software

(Windows)

This software allows you to monitor and control multiple projectors connected to the LAN.

This software allows you to transfer original images, such as company logos to be displayed when projection starts, to the projector.

20 - ENGLISH


Optional accessories

Optional accessories

(product name)

Projection lens

Ceiling Mount Bracket for

Projectors

Projector ceiling mount bracket

Projector Frame for projectors

Replacement lamp unit

Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode)

Replacement Filter Unit

Smoke cut filter

Smoke cut filter

(Replacement)

Upgrade Kit

Zoom lens

ET-D75LE50

Model No.

ET-D75LE6, ET-D75LE8, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20,

ET-D75LE30, ET-D75LE40

Fixed-focus lens

ET-PKD310H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD310S (for Low Ceilings)

ET-PAD310

ET-PFD310

ET-LAD310A (1 pc), ET-LAD310AW (2 pcs)

ET-LAD320P (1 pc), ET-LAD320PW (2 pcs)

ET-EMF320

ET-SFD320

ET-SFR320

ET-UK20 (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

Note f The model numbers of optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.

ENGLISH - 21

Chapter 1 Preparation — Start-up display

Start-up display

When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase as well as when [ALL USER DATA] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[INITIALIZE] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after projection starts, then the initial setting screen is displayed. Set them in accordance with circumstances.

In other occasions, you can change the settings by menu operations.

Focus adjustment

Adjust the focus to display the menu screen clearly.

You may also need to adjust the zoom and shift.

Refer to “Adjusting the focus, zoom, and shift” (x page 56) for details.

1) Press asqw to adjust the focus.

LENS

FOCUS

FOCUS POSITION

ADJUST

+0

2) Press the <MENU> button to proceed to the initial setting.

Initial setting (display language)

Select the language to show on the screen.

After completed the initial setting, you can change the display language from the [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu.

1) Press as to select the display language.

INITIAL SETTING

Please select DISPLAY LANGUAGE.

ENTER

SELECT

SET

2) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.

22 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1 Preparation — Start-up display

Initial setting (installation setting)

Set [PROJECTION METHOD] and [COOLING CONDITION] depending on the installation mode. Refer to “Installation mode” (x page 31) for details.

Set [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] to [ON] when using the projector at high altitudes between 1 400 m (4 593') or higher and lower than 2 700 m

(8 858') above sea level.

After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu.

1) Press as to select an item.

2) Press qw to switch the setting.

INITIAL SETTING

PROJECTION METHOD FRONT/FLOOR

When PROJECTION METHOD is changed, confirm that

COOLING CONDITION is set correctly.

COOLING CONDITION AUTO

It may shorten the life of the lamp and projector if used in incorrect setting.

HIGH ALTITUDE MODE OFF

Switch to HIGH ALTITUDE MODE "ON" if over 1400m

(4593Ft).

CHANGE

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SET

3) Press the <ENTER> button to proceed to the initial setting.

Initial setting (screen setting)

(Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DZ10KU)

Set the screen format (aspect ratio) and display position of the image. After completed the initial setting, you can change the settings of each item from the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SCREEN SETTING].

1) Press as to select an item.


INITIAL SETTING

SCREEN FORMAT

SCREEN POSITION

Set as necessary for the screen in use.

16:10

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SET

CHANGE f [SCREEN FORMAT] (x page 97) f [SCREEN POSITION] (x page 97)

3) Press the <ENTER> button.

f Confirm the setting value and complete the initial setting.

Note f If you press the <MENU> button on the initial setting screen, you can go back to the previous screen.

f To continue operations after completed the initial settings, refer to “Selecting the input signal” (x page 56).

f By default, the time zone of the projector is set to +09:00 (Japan and Korean Standard Time). Change the setting in the [PROJECTOR

SETUP] menu → [DATE AND TIME] → [TIME ZONE] to the time zone of the region where you use the projector.

ENGLISH - 23

Chapter 1 Preparation — About your projector

About your projector

Remote control

Side Front

1

2

3

4

11

19

Top

12

5

6 13

14

15

Bottom

7

8

21

9

10

16

17

18

20

1 Remote control indicator

Flashes if any button in the remote control is pressed.

2 Power standby <v> button

Sets the projector to the state where the projector is switched off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.

3 Power on <b> button

Starts projection when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> when the power is switched off

(standby mode).

4 Input selection (<RGB1>, <RGB2>, <DVI-D>, <VIDEO>,

<HDMI>, <SDI 1/2>) buttons

Switches the input signal to project. (x page 62)

5 <MENU> button/<ENTER> button/asqw buttons

Used to navigate through the menu screen. (x page 65)

6 <ON SCREEN> button

Switches on (display)/off (hide) the on-screen display function.

(x page 61)

7 <TEST> button

Displays the test pattern. (x page 63)

8 Number (<0> - <9>) buttons

Used when the system uses multiple projectors.

Used to input ID numbers or passwords.

9 <STATUS> button

Displays the projector information.

10 <LIGHT> button

Pressing this button lights up the remote control buttons. The lights will go off when the remote control operation goes idle for

10 seconds.

Attention f Do not drop the remote control.

f Avoid contact with liquids or moisture.

f Do not attempt to modify or disassemble the remote control.

11 <AUTO SETUP> button

Automatically adjusts the image display position while projecting the image.

[PROGRESS] is displayed on the screen while adjusting automatically. (x page 62)

12 <SHUTTER> button

Used to temporarily turn off the image. (x page 61)

13 <ASPECT> button

Switches the aspect ratio of the image. (x page 63)

14 Lens (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) buttons

Adjusts the projection lens. (x page 56)

15 <FUNC> button

Assigns a frequently used operation as a shortcut button.

(x page 63)

16 <DEFAULT> button

Resets the content of the sub-menu to the factory default.

(x page 66)

17 <ID SET> button

Sets the ID number of the remote control to use for a system using multiple projectors. (x page 28)

18 <ID ALL> button

Used to simultaneously control all the projectors with one remote control for a system using multiple projectors.

(x page 28)

19 <LOCK> button

Used to prevent unintended operation by careless pressing of the buttons and prevent draining the remote control batteries.

20 Remote control signal transmitter

21 Remote control wired terminal

Connects to the projector with a cable. (x page 29)

24 - ENGLISH


Note f The remote control can be used within a distance of about 30 m (98'5") if pointed directly at the remote control signal receiver. The remote control can control at angles of up to ±15° vertically and ±30° horizontally, but the effective control range may be reduced.

f If there are any obstacles between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver, the remote control may not operate properly.

f The signal will be reflected off the screen. However, the operating range may be limited from light reflection loss due to the screen material.

f If the remote control signal receiver directly receives strong light, such as fluorescent light, the remote control may not operate properly. Use it in a place distant from the light source.

f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will flash if the projector receives a remote control signal.

Projector body

Front

1 2 3 4 5

Side

11 12 13 14

SDI 1/2

6

Rear

7 6 15 16

Bottom

8

Projection direction

9 8

18 14

10 14 17 14

WARNING

Keep your hands and other objects away from the air exhaust port.

f Keep your hands and face away.

f Do not insert your fingers.

f Keep heat-sensitive objects away.

Heated air from the air exhaust port can cause burns, injury, or deformations.

1 Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>

Displays the status of the power.

2 Lamp indicator <LAMP1>

Displays the status of lamp 1.

3 Lamp indicator <LAMP2>

Displays the status of lamp 2.

4 Temperature indicator <TEMP>

Displays the internal temperature status.

5 Filter indicator <FILTER>

Displays the status of the air filter unit.

6 Adjustable feet

Adjusts the projection angle.

7 Remote control signal receiver (front)

8 Air exhaust port

9 Lamp unit cover

10 Remote control signal receiver (rear)

11 Control panel (x page 26)

12 Connecting terminals (x page 27)

ENGLISH - 25


13 Security slot

This security slot is compatible with the Kensington security cables.

14 Air intake port

15 <AC IN> terminal

Connect the supplied power cord.

Attention f Do not block the ventilation ports (intake and exhaust) of the projector.

16 <MAIN POWER> switch

Turns on/off the main power.

17 Air filter cover

The air filter unit is inside.

18 Burglar hook port

Attaches a burglar prevention cable, etc.

r

Control panel

1 9

2

MENU LENS

10

11

5

6

7

8

3

4

VIDEO

RGB 1

RGB 2

DVI-D

HDMI

SDI 1/2

1 Power standby <v> button

Sets the projector to the state where the projector is switched off (standby mode) when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> and in projection mode.

2 Power on <b> button

Starts projection when the <MAIN POWER> switch on the projector is set to <ON> when the power is switched off

(standby mode).

3 <VIDEO> button

Switches the input to VIDEO.

4 <RGB1> button

Switches the input to RGB1.

5 <RGB2> button


6 <DVI-D> button

Switches the input to DVI-D.

7 <HDMI> button

Switches the input to HDMI.

8 <SDI 1/2> button

Switches the input to SDI.


ENTER

SHUTTER

12

13

14

9 <MENU> button

Displays or hides the main menu. (x page 65)

Returns to the previous menu when a sub-menu is displayed.

If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least three seconds while the on-screen display is off, the on-screen display is turned on.

10 <LENS> button

Adjusts the focus, zoom, and shift (position) of the lens.

11 <ENTER> button

Determines and executes an item in the menu screen.

12 <SHUTTER> button

Used to temporarily turn off the image. (x page 61)

13 asqw buttons

Use to select items in the menu screen, change settings, and adjust levels.

Also used to enter a password in [SECURITY] or enter characters.

14 <AUTO SETUP> button

Automatically adjusts the image display position while projecting the image. [PROGRESS] is displayed on the screen while adjusting automatically. (x page 62)

26 - ENGLISH

r

Connecting terminals


1 2 3 4

5 6 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 13

1 <REMOTE 1 IN> terminal/<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal

These are the terminals to connect the remote control for serial control when the system uses multiple projectors.

2 <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal

This is a terminal to remotely control the projector using the external control circuit.

3 <SERIAL IN> terminal

This is the RS-232C compatible terminal to externally control the projector by connecting a computer.

4 <SERIAL OUT> terminal

This is a terminal to output the signal connected to the <SERIAL

IN> terminal.

5 <SDI IN> terminal

This is the terminal to input SDI signals. (Only for PT-DZ10KU)

6 <SDI IN 1> terminal / <SDI IN 2> terminal

This is the terminal to input SDI signals.

(Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

7 <HDMI IN> terminal

This is the terminal to input HDMI signals.

Attention

8 <RGB 1 IN> (<R/P

R

>, <G/Y>, <B/P

B

/C>, <SYNC/HD>, <VD>) terminal

This is a terminal to input RGB signals or the YC

Y/C signals.

B

C

R

/YP

B

P

R

and

9 <RGB 2 IN> terminal

This is a terminal to input RGB signals or YC

B

C

R

/YP

B

P

R

signals.

10 <DVI-D IN> terminal

This is the terminal to input DVI-D signals.

11 <VIDEO IN> terminal

This is the terminal to input video signals.

12 <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal / <3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal

This is a terminal to input or output control signals when using the projector in 3D systems.


13 <LAN> terminal

This is a terminal to connect to the network.

Used for control and monitoring. Image input through network connections is not possible.

f When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.

ENGLISH - 27

Chapter 1 Preparation — Using the remote control

Using the remote control

Inserting and removing the batteries

(ii)

(i)

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

1) Open the cover. (Fig. 1)

2) Insert the batteries and close the cover (insert the m side first). (Fig. 2) f When removing the batteries, perform the steps in reverse order.

Setting the remote control ID numbers

When you use the system with multiple projectors, you can operate all the projectors simultaneously or each projector individually using single remote control, if a unique ID number is assigned to each projector.

After setting the ID number of the projector, set same ID number on the remote control.

The factory default ID number of the projector is set to [ALL]. When using a single projector, press the <ID ALL> button on the remote control. Also, you can control a projector by pressing the <ID ALL> button on the remote control even if you do not know the projector ID.

How to set

1) Press the <ID SET> button on the remote control.

2) Within five seconds, press the two-digit ID number set on the projector using the number (<0> - <9>) buttons.

f If you press the <ID ALL> button, you can control the projectors regardless of the ID number setting of the projector.

Attention f Since the ID number of the remote control can be set without the projector, do not press the <ID SET> button carelessly. If the <ID SET> button is pressed and no number (<0> - <9>) buttons are pressed within five seconds, the ID number returns to its original value before the

<ID SET> button was pressed.

f The ID number set on the remote control will be stored unless it is set again. However, it will be erased if the remote control is left with dead batteries. Set the same ID number again when the batteries are replaced.

Note f Set the ID number of the projector from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTOR ID].

28 - ENGLISH

Chapter 1 Preparation — Using the remote control

Connecting to the projector with a cable

When you use the system with multiple projectors, use commercial M3 stereo mini jack cables and connect the other devices to the <REMOTE

1 IN>/<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminals of the projector body.

The remote control is effective even in places where an obstacle stands in the light path or where devices are susceptible to outside light.

M3 stereo mini jack cable (commercially available)

Connecting to a second projector

Remote control

Connecting to the remote control wired terminal

Connecting terminals

Attention f Use a cable that is 15 m (49'2") or shorter, with 2 core shield. The remote control may not operate when the length of the cable exceeds

15 m (49'2") or when the shielding of the cable is inadequate.

ENGLISH - 29

Chapter 2 Getting Started

This chapter describes things you need to do before using the projector such as the setup and connections.

30 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2 Getting Started — Setting up

Setting up

Installation mode

There are six ways to set up the projector. Set the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] (x page 108) depending on the installation location. Set [COOLING CONDITION] (x page 109) to [AUTO]. Using the projector with [COOLING CONDITION] set incorrectly may shorten the life of the lamp.

Mounting on the ceiling and projecting forward Setting on a desk/floor and projecting from rear

(Using the translucent screen)

Menu item

[PROJECTION METHOD]

[COOLING CONDITION]

Method

[FRONT/CEILING]

[CEILING SETTING]

Mounting on the ceiling and projecting from rear


Menu item



Setting on a desk/floor and projecting forward

Method

[REAR/FLOOR]

[FLOOR SETTING]

Menu item



Portrait setting and projecting from the rear *1


Method

[REAR/CEILING]

[CEILING SETTING]

Menu item



Portrait setting and projecting forward *1

Method

[FRONT/FLOOR]

[FLOOR SETTING]

Menu item



Method

[REAR/FLOOR]

[PORTRAIT SETTING] *2

Menu item



Method

[FRONT/FLOOR]

[PORTRAIT SETTING] *2

*1 For the portrait setting, use the optional Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode) (Model No.: ET-LAD320P (1 pc), ET-LAD320PW (2 pcs)).

*2 Using the optional Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode) (Model No.: ET-LAD320P (1 pc), ET-LAD320PW (2 pcs)) will set the cooling condition to [PORTRAIT SETTING].

Note f In the portrait setting, the on-screen menu is displayed sideways.

ENGLISH - 31


Parts for ceiling mount (optional)

You can install the projector on the ceiling using the optional Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors (Model No.: ET-PKD310H (for High Ceilings),

ET-PKD310S (for Low Ceilings)).

f Be sure to use the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors specified for this projector.

f Refer to the Installation Instructions supplied with the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors when installing the projector with the bracket.

Attention f To ensure projector performance and security, installation of the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors must be carried out by your dealer or a qualified technician.

Screen size and throw distance

Refer to the screen size and projection distances to install the projector. Image size and image position can be adjusted in accordance with the screen size and screen position.

Projection screen

SD Screen

L (LW/LT)

L1

SW

L1

Screen

L (LW/LT)

(Unit: m)

L (LW/LT) *1

L1

SH

SW

SD

Projection distance

Lens protrusion dimension

Image height

Image width

Image diagonal size

*1 LW: Minimum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used

LT: Maximum projection distance when the Zoom Lens is used

(Unit: m)

Projection lens Model No.

ET-D75LE1

ET-D75LE2

ET-D75LE3

ET-D75LE4

ET-D75LE5

ET-D75LE6

ET-D75LE8

ET-D75LE10

ET-D75LE20

ET-D75LE30

ET-D75LE40

ET-D75LE50

L1 dimension (approximate value)

0.1144

0.0989

0.1024

0.1263

0.2024

0.2119

0.2544

0.125

0.121

0.121

0.124

0.203

Attention f Before setting up, read “Precautions for use” (x page 16).

f Do not use the projector and the high-powered laser equipment in the same room. The DLP chips can be damaged if a laser beam hits the lens surface.

32 - ENGLISH


[GEOMETRY] projection range


[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from the side) [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] (viewed from above)

Screen Screen

Vertical arc correction (viewed from the side)

Projection distance

Arc radius

Screen

Horizontal arc correction (viewed from above)

Projection distance

Arc radius

Screen

Arc center

Screen

Arc center

Screen

Projection distance

Arc radius

Projection distance

Arc radius

Standard status

Projection lens Model

No.

ET-D75LE1

ET-D75LE2

ET-D75LE3

ET-D75LE4

ET-D75LE5

ET-D75LE6

ET-D75LE8

ET-D75LE10

ET-D75LE20

ET-D75LE30

ET-D75LE40

ET-D75LE50

Only for [KEYSTONE]

Vertical keystone correction angle α (°)

±40

Horizontal keystone correction angle β (°)

±15

±40

±40

±40

±22

±28

±15

±15

±15

±15

±15

±40

±40

±40

±40

±40

±22

±15

±15

±15

±15

±15

±15

[KEYSTONE] and [CURVED] used together


±20


±15

Min. value of

R2/L2

1.0

Min. value of

R3/L3

2.3

±20

±20

±20

±8

±10

±15

±15

±15

±8

±10

0.8

0.6

0.4

2.0

1.6

1.6

1.1

0.7

4.9

3.9

±20

±20

±20

±20

±20

±8

±15

±15

±15

±15

±15

±8

0.2

1.1

0.9

0.6

0.4

2.0

0.4

2.6

1.7

1.2

0.7

4.9

Only for [CURVED]

Min. value of

R2/L2

Min. value of

R3/L3

0.6

0.5

0.3

0.2

1.2

0.9

0.2

0.6

0.5

0.4

0.2

1.2

2.9

2.3

0.3

1.5

1.0

1.3

0.9

0.6

0.4

0.7

0.4

2.9

ENGLISH - 33


When using the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20)


Projection lens Model

No.

ET-D75LE1

ET-D75LE2

ET-D75LE3

ET-D75LE4

ET-D75LE5

ET-D75LE6

ET-D75LE8

ET-D75LE10

ET-D75LE20

ET-D75LE30

ET-D75LE40

ET-D75LE50

Only for [KEYSTONE]


±40


±40

±40

±45

±40

±40

±45

±22

±28

±45

±40

±40

±45

±45

±22

±40

±15

±15

±40

±40

±40

±40

±40

±15

[KEYSTONE] and [CURVED] used together


±20


±15

Min. value of

R2/L2

0.8

Min. value of

R3/L3

1.8

±20

±20

±15

±15

0.6

0.4

1.2

0.8

±20

±8

±10

±20

±20

±20

±20

±20

±8

±15

±8

±10

±15

±15

±15

±15

±15

±8

0.3

1.5

1.2

0.2

0.9

0.7

0.5

0.3

1.5

0.5

3.7

3.0

0.3

2.0

1.3

0.9

0.5

3.7

Only for [CURVED]

Min. value of

R2/L2

Min. value of

R3/L3

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.9

0.7

0.1

0.5

0.4

0.3

0.2

0.9

1.7

0.2

1.1

0.7

0.5

0.3

2.2

1.0

0.7

0.5

0.3

2.2

*1 Cannot correct [VERTICAL KEYSTONE] and [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE] if the total exceeds 55° when used at the same time.

Note f When [GEOMETRY] is used, the focus of the entire screen may be lost as correction increases.

f Make the curved screen a circular arc shape with one part of a perfect circle removed.

f Adjustment range of the [GEOMETRY] items may not match the listed projection range depending on the projection lens. Use this projector within the projection range, otherwise the correction may not work.

34 - ENGLISH


Projection distance of each projection lens

A ±5 % error in listed projection distances may occur.

In addition, when [GEOMETRY] and [KEYSTONE] are used, distance is corrected to become smaller than the specified screen size.

For PT-DZ13KU, PT-DZ10KU r

When the screen aspect is 16:10

(Unit: m)

Lens type


Throw ratio *1

Projection screen size

Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

0.942

1.077

1.212

1.346

1.615

2.019

2.692

3.365

4.039

4.712

5.385

6.731

8.077

13.462

1.508

1.723

1.939

2.154

2.585

3.231

4.308

5.385

ET-D75LE1

1.4-1.8:1

ET-D75LE2

1.8-2.8:1

Zoom lens

ET-D75LE3 ET-D75LE4 ET-D75LE8 ET-D75LE6

2.8-4.6:1 4.6-7.4:1

Projection distance (L)

Min.

(LW)

7.3-13.8:1 0.9-1.1:1

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.01

2.69

2.72

4.10

4.11

6.90

6.91

11.06 10.78 20.56 1.35

1.62

2.31

3.09

3.12

4.70

4.71

7.90

7.91 12.66 12.37 23.55 1.55

1.86

2.61

3.49

3.52

5.30

5.31

8.91

8.91 14.25 13.97 26.54 1.76

2.10

2.91

3.89

3.92

5.90

5.91

9.91

9.91 15.85 15.57 29.53 1.96

2.34

3.51

4.68

4.73

7.10

7.11

11.91 11.92 19.04 18.76 35.50 2.36

2.82

4.40

5.88

5.93

8.90

8.91 14.92 14.93 23.82 23.54 44.47 2.96

3.55

6.462

7.539

5.89

7.87

7.93

11.91 11.92 19.94 19.95 31.80 31.52 59.41 3.97

4.75

7.39

9.87

9.93 14.91 14.92 24.95 24.96 39.77 39.49 74.36 4.98

5.96

8.88

11.86 11.93 17.91 17.92 29.97 29.98 47.75 47.47 89.30 5.99

10.37 13.86 13.93 20.91 20.92 34.98 34.99 55.72 55.44 104.24 6.99

7.17

8.37

8.616

11.86 15.85 15.94 23.92 23.93 40.00 40.01 63.70 63.42 119.19 8.00

9.58

10.770

14.85 19.84 19.94 29.92 29.93 50.03 50.04 79.65 79.37 149.08 10.01 11.99

12.923

17.83 23.82 23.94 35.93 35.94 60.06 60.07 95.60 95.32 178.96 12.03 14.40

21.539

29.77 39.77 39.96 59.95 59.96 100.18 100.19 159.40 159.13

— 20.08 24.06

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

0.942

1.077

1.212

1.346

1.615

2.019

2.692

3.365

4.039

4.712

5.385

6.731

8.077

13.462

1.508

1.723

1.939

2.154

2.585

3.231

4.308

5.385

Zoom lens Fixed-focus lens

ET-D75LE10 ET-D75LE20 ET-D75LE30 ET-D75LE40 ET-D75LE5 ET-D75LE50

1.3-1.7:1

Max.

(LT)

1.7-2.4:1

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.4-4.7:1 4.6-7.4:1


Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

1.90

2.46

2.46

3.58

3.56

6.94

6.87

11.04

2.19

2.83

2.82

4.11

4.08

7.96

7.88 12.65

2.47

3.20

3.19

4.64

4.61

8.98

8.88 14.25

2.76

3.56

3.55

5.17

5.13

9.99

9.88 15.85

3.32

4.30

4.28

6.22

6.18 12.03 11.89 19.05

4.18

5.40

5.37

7.81

7.75 15.08 14.90 23.85

6.462

7.539

5.60

7.24

7.19 10.45 10.38 20.16 19.92 31.86

7.02

9.07

9.00 13.09 13.0 25.25 24.95 39.86

8.44 10.91 10.82 15.73 15.62 30.34 29.97 47.87

9.86 12.74 12.64 18.37 18.24 35.42 34.99 55.87

8.616

11.28 14.58 14.46 21.01 20.86 40.51 40.01 63.87

10.770

14.12 18.25 18.09 26.29 26.11 50.68 50.05 79.88

12.923

16.96 21.92 21.73 31.58 31.35 60.85 60.09 95.89

21.539

28.33 36.61 36.27 52.70 52.33 101.53 100.25 159.93

0.7:1

Fixed

0.99

1.15

1.30

1.45

1.76

2.22

2.99

3.76

4.53

—

—

—

—

—

0.7:1

Fixed

1.01

1.16

1.32

1.47

1.78

2.24

3.01

3.78

4.56

5.33

6.10

7.64

9.18

15.35

*1 The throw ratio is based on the value during projection onto a 3.81 m (150") screen size.

ENGLISH - 35

Chapter 2 Getting Started — Setting up r


(Unit: m)

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

0.872

0.996

1.121

1.245

1.494

1.868

2.491

3.113

3.736

4.358

4.981

6.226

7.472

12.453

1.550

1.771

1.992

2.214

2.657

3.321

4.428

5.535

ET-D75LE1

1.4-1.8:1

ET-D75LE2

1.8-2.8:1

Zoom lens


2.8-4.6:1 4.6-7.4:1


Min.

(LW)

7.3-13.8:1 0.9-1.1:1

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.07

2.77

2.80

4.21

4.23

7.09

7.10

11.37 11.09 21.14 1.39

1.66

2.38

3.18

3.21

4.83

4.84

8.13

8.13 13.01 12.73 24.21 1.60

1.91

2.68

3.59

3.62

5.45

5.46

9.16

9.16 14.65 14.37 27.29 1.81

2.16

2.99

4.00

4.04

6.07

6.08 10.19 10.19 16.29 16.01 30.36 2.01

2.41

3.60

4.82

4.86

7.30

7.31 12.25 12.26 19.57 19.29 36.50 2.43

2.90

4.53

6.05

6.09

9.15

9.16 15.34 15.35 24.49 24.21 45.72 3.05

3.65

6.641

7.748

6.06

8.10

8.15 12.24 12.25 20.50 20.50 32.69 32.40 61.08 4.08

4.89

7.59 10.15 10.21 15.33 15.34 25.65 25.66 40.88 40.60 76.44 5.12

6.13

9.13 12.19 12.27 18.41 18.42 30.81 30.81 49.08 48.80 91.79 6.15

10.66 14.24 14.32 21.50 21.51 35.96 35.97 57.28 57.00 107.15 7.19

7.37

8.61

8.855

12.19 16.29 16.38 24.58 24.60 41.12 41.12 65.47 65.19 122.51 8.22

9.85

11.069

15.26 20.39 20.50 30.76 30.77 51.42 51.43 81.87 81.59 153.23 10.29 12.33

13.283

18.33 24.49 24.61 36.93 36.94 61.73 61.74 98.26 97.98 183.95 12.36 14.81

22.138

30.60 40.88 41.07 61.62 61.63 102.97 102.98 163.83 163.56

— 20.64 24.73

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

0.872

0.996

1.121

1.245

1.494

1.868

2.491

3.113

3.736

4.358

4.981

6.226

7.472

12.453

1.550

1.771

1.992

2.214

2.657

3.321

4.428

5.535



1.3-1.7:1

Max.

(LT)

1.7-2.4:1

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.4-4.7:1 4.6-7.4:1


Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

1.96

2.53

2.53

3.68

3.66

7.14

7.07

11.36

2.25

2.91

2.91

4.23

4.20

8.19

8.10 13.00

2.54

3.29

3.28

4.77

4.74

9.23

9.13 14.65

2.83

3.67

3.65

5.31

5.28 10.28 10.16 16.29

3.42

4.42

4.40

6.40

6.35 12.37 12.23 19.58

4.29

5.55

5.52

8.03

7.97 15.50 15.32 24.52

6.641

7.748

5.75

7.44

7.39 10.74 10.67 20.73 20.48 32.75

7.21

9.33

9.26 13.46 13.36 25.96 25.64 40.97

8.67

11.21 11.13 16.17 16.06 31.18 30.80 49.20

10.13 13.10 12.99 18.88 18.75 36.41 35.96 57.43

8.855

11.59 14.99 14.86 21.60 21.45 41.64 41.12 65.65

11.069

14.51 18.76 18.60 27.03 26.84 52.09 51.44 82.11

13.283

17.44 22.54 22.33 32.46 32.23 62.54 61.76 98.56

22.138

29.12 37.63 37.28 54.17 53.79 104.36 103.05 164.38

0.7:1

Fixed

1.02

1.18

1.34

1.50

1.81

2.29

3.08

3.87

4.66

—

—

—

—

—

0.7:1

Fixed

1.04

1.20

1.36

1.51

1.83

2.31

3.10

3.89

4.68

5.48

6.27

7.85

9.44

15.78


36 - ENGLISH



(Unit: m)

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

1.067

1.219

1.372

1.524

1.829

2.286

3.048

3.810

4.572

5.334

6.096

7.620

9.144

15.240

1.422

1.626

1.829

2.032

2.438

3.048

4.064

5.080

ET-D75LE1

1.6-2.2:1

ET-D75LE2

2.2-3.3:1

Zoom lens


3.3-5.5:1 5.6-8.9:1


Min.

(LW)

8.8-16.5:1 1.1-1.3:1

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.29

3.06

3.09

4.65

4.66

7.83

7.83 12.54 12.25 23.32 1.54

1.84

2.63

3.51

3.55

5.33

5.34

8.96

8.97 14.34 14.06 26.71 1.77

2.11

2.96

3.96

4.00

6.01

6.02 10.10 10.10 16.15 15.87 30.09 2.00

2.38

3.30

4.41

4.45

6.69

6.70

11.23 11.24 17.96 17.67 33.47 2.22

2.66

3.98

5.32

5.36

8.05

8.06 13.50 13.51 21.57 21.28 40.24 2.68

3.20

4.99

6.67

6.72 10.09 10.10 16.91 16.92 26.98 26.70 50.39 3.36

4.02

6.096

7.112

6.68

8.93

8.99 13.49 13.50 22.59 22.59 36.01 35.73 67.31 4.50

5.39

8.37

11.18 11.25 16.89 16.90 28.27 28.27 45.04 44.76 84.23 5.64

6.76

10.06 13.44 13.52 20.29 20.30 33.94 33.95 54.07 53.79 101.14 6.78

11.75 15.70 15.79 23.69 23.70 39.62 39.63 63.10 62.82 118.06 7.92

8.12

9.49

8.128

13.44 17.96 18.05 27.09 27.10 45.30 45.31 72.13 71.85 134.98 9.06 10.85

10.160

16.82 22.47 22.58 33.89 33.90 56.65 56.66 90.18 89.91 168.81 11.34 13.58

12.192

20.20 26.98 27.12 40.69 40.70 68.01 68.02 108.24 107.96 202.65 13.62 16.32

20.320

33.71 45.04 45.25 67.88 67.90 113.43 113.44 180.46 180.20

— 22.74 27.24

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

1.067

1.219

1.372

1.524

1.829

2.286

3.048

3.810

4.572

5.334

6.096

7.620

9.144

15.240

1.422

1.626

1.829

2.032

2.438

3.048

4.064

5.080



1.6-2.0:1

Max.

(LT)

2.0-2.9:1

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.9-5.6:1 5.5-8.9:1


Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.17

2.80

2.80

4.07

4.04

7.88

7.80 12.52

2.49

3.22

3.21

4.67

4.64

9.03

8.94 14.34

2.81

3.63

3.62

5.27

5.23 10.19 10.07 16.15

3.13

4.05

4.03

5.86

5.82

11.34 11.21 17.96

3.77

4.88

4.86

7.06

7.01 13.64 13.48 21.59

4.74

6.13

6.09

8.85

8.79 17.09 16.89 27.02

6.096

7.112

8.128

10.16

6.35

8.21

8.15

11.84 11.76 22.85 22.58 36.09

7.96 10.28 10.20 14.83 14.73 28.61 28.26 45.15

9.56 12.36 12.26 17.82 17.70 34.36 33.94 54.21

11.17 14.44 14.32 20.81 20.67 40.12 39.63 63.27

12.78 16.52 16.38 23.80 23.63 45.88 45.31 72.33

16.00 20.68 20.49 29.78 29.57 57.39 56.68 90.45

12.192

19.21 24.83 24.61 35.76 35.51 68.91 68.05 108.58

20.320

32.08 41.46 41.07 59.68 59.26 114.96 113.52 181.07

0.8:1

Fixed

5.14

—

—

—

—

—

1.13

1.31

1.48

1.66

2.00

2.53

3.40

4.27

0.8:1

Fixed

1.15

1.33

1.50

1.67

2.02

2.55

3.42

4.29

5.17

6.04

6.91

8.66

10.40

17.39


ENGLISH - 37


For PT-DS12KU r


(Unit: m)

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

1.067

1.219

1.372

1.524

1.829

2.286

3.048

3.810

4.572

5.334

6.096

7.620

9.144

15.240

1.422

1.626

1.829

2.032

2.438

3.048

4.064

5.080

ET-D75LE1

1.5-2.0:1

ET-D75LE2

2.0-30:1

Zoom lens


3.0-5.0:1 5.0-8.0:1


Min.

(LW)

7.9-15.0:1 1.0-1.2:1

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.07

2.77

2.80

4.21

4.23

7.09

7.10

11.37 11.09 21.14 1.39

1.66

2.38

3.18

3.21

4.83

4.84

8.13

8.13 13.01 12.73 24.21 1.60

1.91

2.68

3.59

3.62

5.45

5.46

9.16

9.16 14.65 14.37 27.29 1.81

2.16

2.99

4.00

4.04

6.07

6.08 10.19 10.19 16.29 16.01 30.36 2.01

2.41

3.60

4.82

4.86

7.30

7.31 12.25 12.26 19.57 19.29 36.50 2.43

2.90

4.53

6.05

6.09

9.15

9.16 15.34 15.35 24.49 24.21 45.72 3.05

3.65

6.096

7.112

6.06

8.10

8.15 12.24 12.25 20.50 20.50 32.69 32.40 61.08 4.08

4.89

7.59 10.15 10.21 15.33 15.34 25.65 25.66 40.88 40.60 76.44 5.12

6.13

9.13 12.19 12.27 18.41 18.42 30.81 30.81 49.08 48.80 91.79 6.15

10.66 14.24 14.32 21.50 21.51 35.96 35.97 57.28 57.00 107.15 7.19

7.37

8.61

8.128

12.19 16.29 16.38 24.58 24.60 41.12 41.12 65.47 65.19 122.51 8.22

9.85

10.160

15.26 20.39 20.50 30.76 30.77 51.42 51.43 81.87 81.59 153.23 10.29 12.33

12.192

18.33 24.49 24.61 36.93 36.94 61.73 61.74 98.26 97.98 183.95 12.36 14.81

20.320

30.60 40.88 41.07 61.62 61.63 102.97 102.98 163.83 163.56

— 20.64 24.73

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

1.067

1.219

1.372

1.524

1.829

2.286

3.048

3.810

4.572

5.334

6.096

7.620

9.144

15.240

1.422

1.626

1.829

2.032

2.438

3.048

4.064

5.080



1.4-1.8:1

Max.

(LT)

1.8-2.6:1

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.6-5.1:1 5.0-8.0:1


Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

1.95

2.52

2.52

3.66

3.64

7.10

7.02

11.28

2.24

2.89

2.89

4.20

4.17

8.13

8.05 12.92

2.53

3.27

3.26

4.74

4.71

9.17

9.07 14.56

2.82

3.64

3.63

5.28

5.24 10.21 10.10 16.19

3.40

4.39

4.37

6.36

6.31 12.29 12.15 19.46

4.27

5.52

5.49

7.98

7.92 15.41 15.23 24.37

6.096

7.112

5.72

7.39

7.34 10.67 10.60 20.60 20.35 32.54

7.17

9.27

9.20 13.37 13.28 25.79 25.48 40.72

8.62

11.14 11.06 16.07 15.96 30.99 30.61 48.89

10.07 13.02 12.91 18.77 18.63 36.18 35.74 57.07

8.128

11.52 14.90 14.77 21.46 21.31 41.38 40.87 65.25

10.160

14.42 18.65 18.48 26.86 26.67 51.77 51.12 81.60

12.192

17.33 22.40 22.19 32.25 32.03 62.15 61.38 97.95

20.320

28.93 37.40 37.05 53.83 53.45 103.71 102.41 163.36

0.8:1

Fixed

1.02

1.18

1.34

1.50

1.81

2.29

3.08

3.87

4.66

—

—

—

—

—

0.8:1

Fixed

1.03

1.19

1.35

1.50

1.82

2.29

3.08

3.87

4.65

5.44

6.23

7.80

9.38

15.68


38 - ENGLISH



(Unit: m)

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

0.872

0.996

1.121

1.245

1.494

1.868

2.491

3.113

3.736

4.358

4.981

6.226

7.472

12.453

1.550

1.771

1.992

2.214

2.657

3.321

4.428

5.535

ET-D75LE1

1.5-2.0:1

ET-D75LE2

2.0-30:1

Zoom lens


3.0-5.0:1 5.0-8.0:1


Min.

(LW)

8.0-15.0:1 1.0-1.2:1

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.26

3.02

3.06

4.60

4.61

7.74

7.75 12.40 12.12 23.06 1.52

1.82

2.60

3.47

3.51

5.27

5.28

8.86

8.87 14.18 13.90 26.41 1.75

2.09

2.93

3.92

3.95

5.95

5.96

9.99

9.99 15.97 15.69 29.76 1.97

2.36

3.27

4.36

4.40

6.62

6.63

11.11 11.11 17.76 17.47 33.10 2.20

2.63

3.93

5.26

5.30

7.96

7.97 13.35 13.36 21.33 21.04 39.79 2.65

3.17

4.94

6.60

6.64

9.98

9.99 16.72 16.73 26.68 26.40 49.83 3.33

3.98

6.641

7.748

6.61

8.83

8.89 13.34 13.35 22.34 22.34 35.61 35.33 66.56 4.45

5.33

8.28

11.06 11.13 16.70 16.71 27.95 27.96 44.54 44.26 83.29 5.58

6.68

9.95 13.29 13.37 20.07 20.08 33.57 33.57 53.47 53.19 100.02 6.71

11.62 15.52 15.61 23.43 23.44 39.18 39.19 62.40 62.12 116.75 7.84

8.03

9.38

8.855

13.29 17.76 17.85 26.79 26.80 44.80 44.80 71.33 71.05 133.48 8.96 10.73

11.069

16.63 22.22 22.33 33.51 33.52 56.03 56.03 89.19 88.91 166.95 11.22 13.43

13.283

19.97 26.69 26.82 40.24 40.25 67.26 67.26 107.04 106.77 200.41 13.47 16.14

22.138

33.34 44.54 44.75 67.13 67.15 112.18 112.18 178.47 178.20

— 22.49 26.94

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

0.872

0.996

1.121

1.245

1.494

1.868

2.491

3.113

3.736

4.358

4.981

6.226

7.472

12.453

1.550

1.771

1.992

2.214

2.657

3.321

4.428

5.535



1.4-1.8:1

Max.

(LT)

1.8-2.6:1

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.6-5.1:1 5.0-8.0:1


Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.13

2.75

2.75

4.00

3.97

7.74

7.66 12.31

2.44

3.16

3.15

4.59

4.55

8.88

8.78 14.09

2.76

3.57

3.56

5.17

5.14 10.01 9.90 15.87

3.08

3.98

3.96

5.76

5.72

11.14 11.01 17.65

3.71

4.79

4.77

6.94

6.89 13.40 13.25 21.21

4.66

6.02

5.98

8.70

8.64 16.80 16.60 26.56

6.641

7.748

6.24

8.06

8.01

11.64 11.56 22.46 22.19 35.46

7.82

10.11 10.03 14.58 14.47 28.11 27.77 44.37

9.40 12.15 12.05 17.51 17.39 33.77 33.36 53.27

10.98 14.19 14.07 20.45 20.31 39.43 38.95 62.18

8.855

12.56 16.23 16.10 23.39 23.23 45.09 44.53 71.09

11.069

15.72 20.32 20.14 29.27 29.06 56.40 55.70 88.90

13.283

18.88 24.41 24.18 35.15 34.90 67.72 66.88 106.71

22.138

31.53 40.75 40.36 58.65 58.24 112.98 111.56 177.96

0.8:1

Fixed

1.12

1.29

1.47

1.64

1.98

2.5

3.36

4.22

5.08

—

—

—

—

—

0.7:1

Fixed

1.13

1.30

1.47

1.64

1.99

2.50

3.36

4.22

5.08

5.93

6.79

8.51

10.22

17.09


ENGLISH - 39


For PT-DW11KU r


(Unit: m)

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

0.872

0.996

1.121

1.245

1.494

1.868

2.491

3.113

3.736

4.358

4.981

6.226

7.472

12.453

1.550

1.771

1.992

2.214

2.657

3.321

4.428

5.535

ET-D75LE1

1.5-2.0:1

ET-D75LE2

2.1-3.1:1

Zoom lens


3.1-5.2:1 5.2-8.2:1


Min.

(LW)

8.2-15.4:1 1.0-1.2:1

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.32

3.10

3.14

4.72

4.73

7.94

7.94 12.71 12.43 23.65 1.56

1.87

2.66

3.56

3.60

5.41

5.42

9.09

9.09 14.54 14.26 27.08 1.79

2.14

3.01

4.02

4.06

6.10

6.11

10.24 10.25 16.37 16.09 30.51 2.02

2.42

3.35

4.48

4.52

6.79

6.80

11.39 11.40 18.21 17.92 33.94 2.25

2.70

4.03

5.39

5.44

8.17

8.18 13.69 13.70 21.87 21.58 40.80 2.72

3.25

5.06

6.76

6.81 10.23 10.24 17.15 17.15 27.36 27.08 51.09 3.41

4.08

6.641

7.748

6.77

9.05

9.11

13.68 13.69 22.90 22.91 36.51 36.23 68.25 4.56

5.47

8.49

11.34 11.41 17.13 17.14 28.66 28.67 45.67 45.39 85.40 5.72

6.85

10.20 13.63 13.71 20.57 20.58 34.42 34.42 54.82 54.54 102.55 6.87

11.91 15.92 16.00 24.02 24.03 40.17 40.18 63.97 63.70 119.70 8.03

8.24

9.62

8.855

13.63 18.21 18.30 27.47 27.48 45.93 45.93 73.13 72.85 136.85 9.18

11.01

11.069

17.05 22.78 22.90 34.36 34.37 57.44 57.45 91.43 91.16 171.16 11.49 13.78

13.283

20.48 27.36 27.49 41.25 41.26 68.95 68.96 109.74 109.47 205.46 13.80 16.55

22.138

34.18 45.67 45.88 68.83 68.84 115.00 115.01 182.97 182.70

— 23.04 27.63

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

0.872

0.996

1.121

1.245

1.494

1.868

2.491

3.113

3.736

4.358

4.981

6.226

7.472

12.453

1.550

1.771

1.992

2.214

2.657

3.321

4.428

5.535



1.4-1.9:1

Max.

(LT)

1.8-2.7:1

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.7-5.2:1 5.1-8.2:1


Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.18

2.82

2.82

4.10

4.07

7.94

7.86 12.62

2.51

3.24

3.23

4.70

4.67

9.10

9.01 14.45

2.83

3.66

3.65

5.31

5.27 10.26 10.15 16.27

3.15

4.08

4.06

5.91

5.87

11.42 11.30 18.10

3.80

4.92

4.89

7.11

7.07 13.74 13.59 21.75

4.78

6.17

6.14

8.92

8.86 17.22 17.02 27.23

6.641

7.748

6.40

8.27

8.21

11.93 11.85 23.03 22.75 36.36

8.02 10.36 10.28 14.95 14.84 28.83 28.48 45.49

9.64 12.46 12.36 17.96 17.83 34.63 34.20 54.62

11.26 14.55 14.43 20.97 20.82 40.43 39.93 63.75

8.855

12.88 16.65 16.50 23.98 23.81 46.23 45.66 72.88

11.069

16.12 20.83 20.65 30.01 29.80 57.83 57.11 91.14

13.283

19.36 25.02 24.80 36.03 35.78 69.43 68.56 109.40

22.138

32.32 41.78 41.38 60.13 59.70 115.83 114.38 182.44

0.8:1

Fixed

1.15

1.33

1.50

1.68

2.03

2.56

3.44

4.33

5.21

—

—

—

—

—

0.8:1

Fixed

1.16

1.34

1.51

1.69

2.04

2.57

3.45

4.33

5.21

6.09

6.96

8.72

10.48

17.52


40 - ENGLISH



(Unit: m)

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

1.067

1.219

1.372

1.524

1.829

2.286

3.048

3.810

4.572

5.334

6.096

7.620

9.144

15.240

1.422

1.626

1.829

2.032

2.438

3.048

4.064

5.080

ET-D75LE1

2.0-2.7:1

ET-D75LE2

2.7-4.1:1

Zoom lens


4.1-6.9:1 6.9-11.0:1


Min.

(LW)

10.9-20.5:1 1.4-1.6:1

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.86

3.82

3.86

5.80

5.81

9.74

9.75 15.59 15.30 29.04 1.92

2.30

3.28

4.38

4.42

6.65

6.66

11.15 11.16 17.83 17.55 33.24 2.21

2.64

3.70

4.94

4.98

7.49

7.50 12.56 12.57 20.07 19.79 37.44 2.49

2.98

4.12

5.50

5.55

8.33

8.34 13.97 13.98 22.31 22.03 41.64 2.77

3.32

4.96

6.62

6.67 10.02 10.03 16.79 16.80 26.79 26.51 50.04 3.34

4.00

6.21

8.30

8.36 12.55 12.56 21.02 21.03 33.52 33.24 62.64 4.19

5.01

6.096

7.112

8.31

11.11 11.17 16.77 16.78 28.07 28.07 44.72 44.44 83.63 5.60

6.71

10.41 13.91 13.99 20.99 21.00 35.12 35.12 55.93 55.65 104.63 7.01

8.40

12.51 16.71 16.80 25.21 25.22 42.16 42.17 67.14 66.86 125.63 8.43 10.10

14.60 19.51 19.61 29.43 29.44 49.21 49.22 78.34 78.07 146.63 9.84

11.80

8.128

16.70 22.31 22.43 33.65 33.66 56.26 56.26 89.55 89.28 167.63 11.26 13.49

10.160

20.89 27.92 28.05 42.09 42.10 70.35 70.36 111.96 111.69 209.62 14.08 16.88

12.192

25.09 33.52 33.68 50.53 50.54 84.45 84.45 134.38 134.11 251.62 16.91 20.27

20.320

41.86 55.93 56.18 84.29 84.30 140.83 140.83 224.03 223.77

— 28.22 33.84

Lens type


Throw ratio *1


Diagonal (SD)

1.78 (70")

2.03 (80")

2.29 (90")

2.54 (100")

3.05 (120")

3.81 (150")

5.08 (200")

6.35 (250")

7.62 (300")

8.89 (350")

10.16 (400")

12.70 (500")

15.24 (600")

25.40 (1000")

Height

(SH)

1.067

1.219

1.372

1.524

1.829

2.286

3.048

3.810

4.572

5.334

6.096

7.620

9.144

15.240

1.422

1.626

1.829

2.032

2.438

3.048

4.064

5.080



1.9-2.5:1

Max.

(LT)

2.5-3.6:1

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

3.6-6.9:1 6.8-10.9:1


Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

Min.

(LW)

Max.

(LT)

2.69

3.48

3.47

5.05

5.01

9.77

9.66 15.49

3.09

3.99

3.98

5.78

5.75

11.19 11.06 17.72

3.49

4.51

4.49

6.52

6.48 12.61 12.46 19.96

3.88

5.02

4.99

7.26

7.21 14.03 13.86 22.19

4.68

6.05

6.01

8.74

8.68 16.87 16.67 26.67

5.87

7.58

7.53 10.95 10.87 21.13 20.88 33.37

6.096

7.112

7.85 10.15 10.07 14.64 14.53 28.23 27.89 44.55

9.83 12.71 12.61 18.32 18.20 35.33 34.90 55.73

11.82 15.28 15.15 22.01 21.86 42.43 41.91 66.91

13.80 17.84 17.68 25.70 25.52 49.53 48.92 78.08

8.128

15.78 20.40 20.22 29.39 29.18 56.64 55.93 89.26

10.160

19.75 25.53 25.30 36.76 36.50 70.84 69.95 111.62

12.192

23.72 30.66 30.38 44.14 43.83 85.04 83.98 133.97

20.320

39.59 51.17 50.68 73.64 73.12 141.85 140.07 223.40

1.0:1

Fixed

1.43

1.64

1.86

2.08

2.51

3.16

4.24

5.32

6.40

—

—

—

—

—

1.0:1

Fixed

1.44

1.65

1.87

2.08

2.51

3.16

4.24

5.31

6.39

7.47

8.54

10.70

12.85

21.46


ENGLISH - 41


Formula to calculate projection distance per projection lens

To use a screen size not listed in this manual, check the screen size SD (m) and use the respective formula to calculate projection distance.

The unit of all the formulae is m. (Values obtained by the following calculation formulae contain a slight error.)

For PT-DZ13KU, PT-DZ10KU r

Zoom lens


ET-D75LE1

ET-D75LE2

ET-D75LE3

ET-D75LE4

ET-D75LE8

ET-D75LE6

ET-D75LE10

ET-D75LE20

Throw ratio

1.4 to 1.8:1

1.4 to 1.8:1

1.6 to 2.2:1

1.8 to 2.8:1

1.8 to 2.8:1

2.2 to 3.3:1

2.8 to 4.6:1

2.8 to 4.6:1

3.3 to 5.5:1

4.6 to 7.4:1

4.6 to 7.4:1

5.6 to 8.9:1

7.3 to 13.8:1

7.3 to 13.8:1

8.8 to 16.5:1

0.9 to 1.1:1

0.9 to 1.1:1

1.1 to 1.3:1

1.3 to 1.7:1

1.3 to 1.7:1

1.6 to 2.0:1

1.7 to 2.4:1

1.7 to 2.4:1

2.0 to 2.9:1

Aspect ratio

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Projection distance (L) formula

L = 1.1732 x SD - 0.0760

L = 1.5709 x SD - 0.1004

L = 1.2087 x SD - 0.0760

L = 1.6142 x SD - 0.1004

L = 1.3307 x SD - 0.0760

L = 1.7756 x SD - 0.1004

L = 1.5748 x SD - 0.0795

L = 2.3661 x SD - 0.1064

L = 1.6220 x SD - 0.0795

L = 2.4291 x SD - 0.1064

L = 1.7835 x SD - 0.0795

L = 2.6772 x SD - 0.1064

L = 2.3661 x SD - 0.0958

L = 3.9488 x SD - 0.1216

L = 2.4291 x SD - 0.0958

L = 4.0591 x SD - 0.1216

L = 2.6772 x SD - 0.0958

L = 4.4724 x SD - 0.1216

L = 3.9488 x SD - 0.1158

L = 6.2795 x SD - 0.1013

L = 4.0591 x SD - 0.1158

L = 6.4528 x SD - 0.1013

L = 4.4724 x SD - 0.1158

L = 7.1102 x SD - 0.1013

L = 6.2795 x SD - 0.3862

L = 11.7677 x SD - 0.3598

L = 6.4567 x SD - 0.3862

L = 12.0945 x SD - 0.3598

L = 7.1102 x SD - 0.3862

L = 13.3189 x SD - 0.3598

L = 0.7913 x SD - 0.0566

L = 0.9488 x SD - 0.0736

L = 0.8150 x SD - 0.0566

L = 0.9764 x SD - 0.0736

L = 0.8976 x SD - 0.0566

L = 1.0748 x SD - 0.0736

L = 1.1186 x SD - 0.0857

L = 1.4458 x SD - 0.1085

L = 1.1497 x SD - 0.0857

L = 1.4860 x SD - 0.1085

L = 1.2663 x SD - 0.0857

L = 1.6367 x SD - 0.1085

L = 1.4312 x SD - 0.0832

L = 2.0795 x SD - 0.1162

L = 1.4709 x SD - 0.0832

L = 2.1373 x SD - 0.1162

L = 1.6202 x SD - 0.0832

L = 2.3542 x SD - 0.1162

42 - ENGLISH


ET-D75LE30

ET-D75LE40


Throw ratio

2.4 to 4.7:1

2.4 to 4.7:1

2.9 to 5.6:1

4.6 to 7.4:1

4.6 to 7.4:1

5.5 to 8.9:1

Aspect ratio

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)


L = 2.0647 x SD - 0.1131

L = 4.0041 x SD - 0.1765

L = 2.1221 x SD - 0.1131

L = 4.1155 x SD - 0.1765

L = 2.3374 x SD - 0.1131

L = 4.5330 x SD - 0.1765

L = 3.9532 x SD - 0.1577

L = 6.3027 x SD - 0.1615

L = 4.0631 x SD - 0.1577

L = 6.4779 x SD - 0.1615

L = 4.4754 x SD - 0.1577

L = 7.1351 x SD - 0.1615

r

Fixed-focus lens


ET-D75LE5

ET-D75LE50

For PT-DS12KU r

Zoom lens


ET-D75LE1

ET-D75LE2

ET-D75LE3

ET-D75LE4

ET-D75LE8

ET-D75LE6

ET-D75LE10

Throw ratio

0.7:1

0.7:1

0.8:1

0.7:1

0.7:1

0.8:1

Aspect ratio

16:10

16:9

4:3

16:10

16:9

4:3


L = 0.6063 x SD - 0.0835

L = 0.6220 x SD - 0.0835

L = 0.6850 x SD - 0.0835

L = 0.6072 x SD - 0.0713

L = 0.6240 x SD - 0.0713

L = 0.6873 x SD - 0.0713

Throw ratio

1.5 to 2.0:1

2.0 to 3.0:1

3.0 to 5.0:1

5.0 to 8.0:1

7.9 to 15.0:1

8.0 to 15.0:1

1.0 to 1.2:1

1.4 to 1.8:1

Aspect ratio

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)


L = 1.2087 x SD - 0.0760

L = 1.6142 x SD - 0.1004

L = 1.3150 x SD - 0.0760

L = 1.7559 x SD - 0.1004

L = 1.6220 x SD - 0.0795

L = 2.4291 x SD - 0.1064

L = 1.7638 x SD - 0.0795

L = 2.6457 x SD - 0.1064

L = 2.4291 x SD - 0.0958

L = 4.0591 x SD - 0.1216

L = 2.6457 x SD - 0.0958

L = 4.4213 x SD - 0.1216

L = 4.0591 x SD - 0.1158

L = 6.4528 x SD - 0.1013

L = 4.4213 x SD - 0.1158

L = 7.0315 x SD - 0.1013

L = 6.4567 x SD - 0.3862

L = 12.0945 x SD - 0.3598

L = 7.0315 x SD - 0.3862

L = 13.1732 x SD - 0.3598

L = 0.8150 x SD - 0.0566

L = 0.9764 x SD - 0.0736

L = 0.8858 x SD - 0.0566

L = 1.0630 x SD - 0.0736

L = 1.1425 x SD - 0.0857

L = 1.4767 x SD - 0.1085

L = 1.2446 x SD - 0.0857

L = 1.6086 x SD - 0.1085

ENGLISH - 43


ET-D75LE20

ET-D75LE30

ET-D75LE40


Throw ratio

1.8 to 2.6:1

2.6 to 5.1:1

5.0 to 8.0:1

Aspect ratio

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)


L = 1.4618 x SD - 0.0832

L = 2.1241 x SD - 0.1162

L = 1.5924 x SD - 0.0832

L = 2.3137 x SD - 0.1162

L = 2.1089 x SD - 0.1131

L = 4.0899 x SD - 0.1765

L = 2.2972 x SD - 0.1131

L = 4.4552 x SD - 0.1765

L = 4.0379 x SD - 0.1577

L = 6.4377 x SD - 0.1615

L = 4.3985 x SD - 0.1577

L = 7.0126 x SD - 0.1615

r



ET-D75LE5

ET-D75LE50

For PT-DW11KU r

Zoom lens


ET-D75LE1

ET-D75LE2

ET-D75LE3

ET-D75LE4

ET-D75LE8

ET-D75LE6

ET-D75LE10

Throw ratio

0.8:1

0.8:1

Aspect ratio

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9


L = 0.6220 x SD - 0.0835

L = 0.6772 x SD - 0.0835

L = 0.6202 x SD - 0.0713

L = 0.6755 x SD - 0.0713

Throw ratio

1.5 to 2.0:1

2.0 to 2.7:1

2.1 to 3.1:1

2.7 to 4.1:1

3.1 to 5.2:1

4.1 to 6.9:1

5.2 to 8.2:1

6.9 to 11.0:1

8.2 to 15.4:1

10.9 to 20.5:1

1.0 to 1.2:1

1.4 to 1.6:1

1.4 to 1.9:1

1.9 to 2.5:1

Aspect ratio

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)


L = 1.3504 x SD - 0.0760

L = 1.8031 x SD - 0.1004

L = 1.6496 x SD - 0.0760

L = 2.2047 x SD - 0.1004

L = 1.8110 x SD - 0.0795

L = 2.7126 x SD - 0.1064

L = 2.2165 x SD - 0.0795

L = 3.3228 x SD - 0.1064

L = 2.7126 x SD - 0.0958

L = 4.5315 x SD - 0.1216

L = 3.3228 x SD - 0.0958

L = 5.5472 x SD - 0.1216

L = 4.5315 x SD - 0.1158

L = 7.2087 x SD - 0.1013

L = 5.5472 x SD - 0.1158

L = 8.8228 x SD - 0.1013

L = 7.2087 x SD - 0.3862

L = 13.5039 x SD - 0.3598

L = 8.8228 x SD - 0.3862

L = 16.5354 x SD - 0.3598

L = 0.9094 x SD - 0.0566

L = 1.0906 x SD - 0.0736

L = 1.1142 x SD - 0.0566

L = 1.3346 x SD - 0.0736

L = 1.2759 x SD - 0.0857

L = 1.6491 x SD - 0.1085

L = 1.5620 x SD - 0.0857

L = 2.0190 x SD - 0.1085

44 - ENGLISH


ET-D75LE20

ET-D75LE30

ET-D75LE40


Throw ratio

1.8 to 2.7:1

2.5 to 3.6:1

2.7 to 5.2:1

3.6 to 6.9:1

5.1 to 8.2:1

6.8 to 10.9:1

Aspect ratio

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)

Min. (LW)

Max. (LT)


L = 1.6324 x SD - 0.0832

L = 2.3720 x SD - 0.1162

L = 1.9986 x SD - 0.0832

L = 2.9040 x SD - 0.1162

L = 2.3550 x SD - 0.1131

L = 4.5673 x SD - 0.1765

L = 2.8833 x SD - 0.1131

L = 5.5917 x SD - 0.1765

L = 4.5092 x SD - 0.1577

L = 7.1891 x SD - 0.1615

L = 5.5206 x SD - 0.1577

L = 8.8016 x SD - 0.1615

r



ET-D75LE5

ET-D75LE50

Throw ratio

0.8:1

1.0:1

0.8:1

1.0:1

Aspect ratio

16:9

4:3

16:9

4:3


L = 0.6929 x SD - 0.0835

L = 0.8504 x SD - 0.0835

L = 0.6925 x SD - 0.0713

L = 0.8479 x SD - 0.0713

Adjusting adjustable feet

Install the projector on a flat surface so that the front of the projector is parallel to the screen surface and the projection screen is rectangular.

If the screen is tilted downward, the projection screen can be adjusted to be rectangular by adjusting the front adjustable feet. The adjustable feet can also be used to adjust the projector to be level when it is tilted in the horizontal direction.

Extend the adjustable feet by rotating in the direction shown in the figure and retract by rotating in the opposite direction.

Adjustable amount

Front adjustable feet: Approx. 50 mm (1-31/32")

Rear adjustable feet: Approx. 10 mm (13/32")

Attention f Heated air is expelled from the air exhaust port while the lamp is lit. Do not touch the air exhaust port directly when adjusting the adjustable feet. (x page 25)

ENGLISH - 45

Chapter 2 Getting Started — Attaching/removing the projection lens (optional)

Attaching/removing the projection lens (optional)

Move the projection lens to the home position before replacing or removing the projection lens. (x page 57)

Attention f Replace the projection lens after turning off the power of the projector.

f Do not touch the lens signal receiver. Dust or dirt may cause defective contact.

f Do not touch the surface of the projection lens with your bare hands.

f Before attaching the projection lens, remove the lens cover attached to the projection lens.

Attaching the projection lens

Attach the projection lens using the following procedure.

Screw hole A

Lens fixing screw

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

1) Insert by aligning the projection lens mark (orange) with the mark on the projector body (E to the left of LOCK) and turn clockwise until it clicks. (Fig. 1)

2) Secure the projection lens with the lens fixing screw supplied. (Fig. 2) f Use a Phillips screwdriver to secure it in the screw hole A to the right of the projection lens mark (orange).

Note f Some lenses may not have a screw hole for securing the projection lens.

Attention f Turn the projection lens counterclockwise to confirm that it does not come out.

f Store the removed dust sponge in a safe place to transport or store.

Removing the projection lens

Remove the projection lens using the following procedure.

Lock button

1) Remove the lens fixing screw.

f Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove the first screw to the right of the projection lens mark (orange).

2) While pressing the lock button, turn the projection lens counterclockwise to remove.

f Turn counterclockwise until the projection lens mark (orange) is at the mark on the projector body (E to the left of LOCK).

Note f Some lenses may not have a screw hole to use to secure the projection lens.

46 - ENGLISH

Chapter 2 Getting Started — Attaching/removing the projection lens (optional)

Attention f Store the removed projection lens where it will be free from vibration and impact.

f Store the removed lens fixing screw in a safe place.

ENGLISH - 47

Chapter 2 Getting Started — Connecting

Connecting

Before connecting

f Before connecting, carefully read the operating instructions for the external device to be connected.

f Turn off the power of all devices before connecting cables.

f Take note of the following points before connecting the cables. Failure to do so may result in malfunctions.

g When connecting a cable to a device connected to the projector or the projector itself, touch any nearby metallic objects to eliminate static electricity from your body before performing work.

g Do not use unnecessarily long cables to connect to a device connected to the projector or to the projector body. The longer the cable, the more it is susceptible to noise. Since using a cable while it is wound makes it act like an antenna, it is more susceptible to noise.

g When connecting cables, connect GND first, then insert the connecting terminal of the connecting device in a straight manner.

f Acquire any connection cable necessary to connect the external device to the system that is neither supplied with the device nor available as an option.

f Video signals containing too much jitter may cause the images on the screen to randomly wobble or wafture. In this case, a time base corrector (TBC) must be connected.

f The projector accepts video signals (including Y/C signals), analog RGB signals (synchronous signals are TTL level), and digital signals.

f Some computer models are not compatible with the projector.

f Use a cable compensator when you connect devices to the projector using long cables. Otherwise the image may not display properly.

f Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 175) for the types of video signals that can be used with the projector.

<RGB 2 IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names

(6)

Outside view

(11)

(1)

(15)

(5)

(10)

Pin No.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

Signal name

R/P

R

G/Y

B/P

B

―

GND

GND

GND

GND

<HDMI IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names

Outside view

Even-numbered pins of (2) to (18)

(2) (18)

(1) (19)

Odd-numbered pins of (1) to (19)

Pin No.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

Signal name

T.M.D.S data 2+

T.M.D.S data 2 shield

T.M.D.S data 2-

T.M.D.S data 1+


T.M.D.S data 1-

T.M.D.S data 0+


T.M.D.S data 0-

T.M.D.S clock+

Pin No.

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(19)

Pin No.

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

(13)

(14)

(15)

Signal name

―

GND

GND

DDC data

SYNC/HD

VD

DDC clock

Signal name

T.M.D.S clock shield

T.M.D.S clock-

CEC

—

SCL

SDA

DDC/CEC

GND

+5 V

Hot plug detection

48 - ENGLISH


<DVI-D IN> terminal pin assignments and signal names

(16)

Outside view

(24)

(8)

(17)

(1)

(9)

Pin No.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

(10)

(11)

(12)

Connecting example: AV equipment

Signal name

T.M.D.S data 2-

T.M.D.S data 2+

T.M.D.S data 2/4 shield

—

—

DDC clock

DDC data

—

T.M.D.S data 1-

T.M.D.S clock1+


—

For <HDMI IN>/<DVI-D IN>/<VIDEO IN> terminals

Pin No.

(13)

(14)

(15)

(16)

(17)

(18)

(19)

(20)

(21)

(22)

(23)

(24)

Signal name

—

+5 V

GND

Hot plug detection

T.M.D.S data 0-

T.M.D.S data 0+


—

—

T.M.D.S clock shield

T.M.D.S clock+

T.M.D.S clock-

DVD player with HDMI terminal (HDCP)

Blu-ray disc player VCR (with built-in TBC)

Attention f Always use one of the following when connecting a VCR.

g A VCR with built-in time base corrector (TBC) g A time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the VCR f If nonstandard burst signals are connected, the image may be distorted. In such case, connect the time base corrector (TBC) between the projector and the external devices.

Note f When entering DVI-D, some external devices to be connected may require switching the setting using the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu →

[DVI-D IN] → [EDID].

f The <DVI-D IN> terminal can be connected to HDMI- or DVI-D-compliant devices. However, images may not appear or may not be displayed properly on some devices.

f For an HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to HDMI standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be displayed.

f The <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device with a DVI-D terminal by using an HDMI/DVI conversion cable, but some devices may not project the image properly or function properly.

f The projector does not support VIERA Link (HDMI).

ENGLISH - 49


For <SDI IN 1>/<SDI IN 2> terminals (PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU), <SDI IN> terminal (PT-DZ10KU)

The connection example is for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU.

Digital VCR for commercial use

SD-SDI signal, HD-SDI signal or 3G-SDI signal

Note f Use the [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR] to switch the input format.

f Some external devices to be connected require the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SDI IN] to be set.

f Use a 5CFB or higher (such as 5CFB, or 7CFB) or a Belden 1694A or higher connection cable to properly transmit images. Use a connection cable of 100 m (328'1") length or less.

f To enter dual link signals, the [SDI LINK] in [SDI IN] must be set. (Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU) f Use the same length and same type of cables to connect <SDI IN 1>/<SDI IN 2> terminals when entering dual link signals. If there is a difference of 4 m (13'1") or greater in cable length, images may not be projected properly. (Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU) f To input dual link signals, connect directly without going through a distributor or other such device to the external device which outputs signals. A phase difference may occur between the LINK-A signal and the LINK-B signal and images may not be projected properly. (Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU) f When an unsteady signal is connected, an error in signal detection may occur. In such a case, use the [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM

SELECTOR] to switch to a system that matches the signal format.

Connecting example: Computers

Control computer

Computer

Computer

Control computer

Computer Computer

Attention f When connecting the projector to a computer or an external device, use the power cord supplied with each device and commercially available shielded cables.

f Use a commercial cable with a ferrite core for connecting with the <DVI-D IN> terminal.

Note f When entering DVI-D, some external devices to be connected may require switching the setting using the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu →

[DVI-D IN] → [EDID].

f For an HDMI cable, use an HDMI High Speed cable that conforms to HDMI standards. If a cable that does not conform to HDMI standards is used, images may be interrupted or may not be displayed.

f The <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector can be connected to an external device with a DVI-D terminal by using an HDMI/DVI conversion cable, but some devices may not project the image properly or function properly.

f The <DVI-D IN> terminal supports single links only.

f When entering the SYNC ON GREEN signal, do not enter sync signals to the <SYNC/HD> terminal or the <VD> terminal.

f If you operate the projector using the computer with the resume feature (last memory), you may have to reset the resume feature to operate the projector.

50 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3 Basic Operations

This chapter describes basic operations to start with.

ENGLISH - 51

Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Switching on/off the projector

Switching on/off the projector

Connecting the power cord

Make sure that the supplied power cord is securely fixed to the projector body to prevent it from being removed easily.

Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch is on the <OFF> side before connecting the power cord.

For details of power cord handling, refer to “Read this first!” (x page 2).

Attaching the power cord

1) Check the shapes of the <AC IN> terminal on the side of the projector body and the power cord connector and insert the plug completely in the correct direction (until you hear the side tabs click in place).

Removing the power cord

1) Confirm that the <MAIN POWER> switch on the side of the projector body is on the <OFF> side, and remove the power plug from the outlet.

2) Remove the power cord connector from the <AC IN> terminal of the projector body while pressing the side tabs.

Power indicator

Displays the status of the power. Check the <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> status of the power indicator before operating the projector.

Power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)>

Indicator status

Off

Red

Green

Orange

52 - ENGLISH

Lit

Lit

Lit

Projector status

The main power is switched off.

The power is switched off (in standby mode).

Projection will start when the power on <b> button is pressed.

f The projector may not operate when the lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2> or temperature indicator <TEMP> are flashing. (x page 155)

Projecting.

The projector is preparing to switch off the projector.

The power is switched off after a while. (Changes to the standby mode.)


Note f While the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is lit in orange, the fan is running to cool the projector.

f For about 75 seconds after the projector is switched off and the luminous lamp cooling is started, the lamp indicators will not light up even if the power is switched on. After the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in red, turn on the power again.

f The projector consumes power even in standby mode (power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lit in red). Refer to “Power consumption”

(x page 180) for the power consumption.

f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> flashes if a remote control signal is received.

f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> flashes slowly in green while the shutter is closed.

f If the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is flashing in red, consult your dealer.

Switching on the projector

Install the projection lens before switching on the projector.

Remove the lens cover first.

4)

4)

MENU LENS

SDI 1/2

VIDEO

RGB 1

RGB 2

DVI-D

HDMI

SDI 1/2

ENTER

SHUTTER

1) 2) 3)

1) Connect the power cord to the projector body.

2) Connect the power plug to an outlet.

f (AC 120 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz)

3) Press the <ON> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn on the power.

f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will light in red, and the projector will enter the standby mode.

4) Press the power on <b> button. f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in green and the image is soon projected on the screen.

Attention f Using the projector while the lens cover is attached may cause the device to heat up and result in a fire.

Note f If the projector is switched on at around 0 °C (32 °F), a warm-up period of approximately five minutes may be necessary until an image is displayed.

The temperature indicator <TEMP> lights during the warm-up period. When the warm-up is completed, the temperature indicator <TEMP> turns off and the projection starts. Refer to “When an indicator lights up” (x page 155) for the indicator status.

f If the operating environment temperature is low and warm-up takes more than five minutes, the projector will judge that a problem has occurred and the power will automatically be set to standby mode. If this happens, increase the operating environment temperature to 0 °C

(32 °F) or higher, turn off the main power, and then switch on the projector again.

f If the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], it may take approx. 10 seconds longer before the projector starts projecting after the power is turned on, compared with when [NORMAL] is set.

f If the <MAIN POWER> switch was set to <OFF> during projection to end the projection using the direct power off function last time, and the

<MAIN POWER> switch is set to <ON> with the power plug connected to the outlet, the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will light in green and the image will soon be projected on the screen.

ENGLISH - 53


Making adjustments and selections

It is recommended that images are projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.

MENU

2) 1) 5) 7) 8) 9)

LENS

SDI 1/2

4)

3)

VIDEO

RGB 1

RGB 2

DVI-D

HDMI

SDI 1/2

AUTO

SETUP

6)

ENTER

SHUTTER

1) 8)

6)

3)

2)

5)

7) 9)

1) Press the <FOCUS> button to roughly adjust the focus of the image. (x page 56)

2) Change the settings of the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [PROJECTION METHOD] and [COOLING

CONDITION] depending on the installation mode. (x page 31) f Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen.

3) Press the input selection (<RGB1>, <RGB2>, <DVI-D>, <VIDEO>, <HDMI>, <SDI 1/2>) buttons to select the input signal.

(SDI input is only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DZ10KU)

4) Adjust the front, back and sideway tilt of the projector with the adjustable feet. (x page 45)

5) Press the <SHIFT> button to adjust the position of the image.

6) If the input signal is an RGB signal, press the <AUTO SETUP> button.

7) Press the <ZOOM> button to adjust the size of the image to match the screen.

8) Press the <FOCUS> button again to adjust the focus.

9) Press the <ZOOM> button again to adjust the zoom and the size of the image to match the screen.

Note f When the projector is switched on for the first time after purchase as well as when [ALL USER DATA] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[INITIALIZE] is executed, the focus adjustment screen is displayed after projection starts, then the initial setting screen is displayed. Refer to

“Start-up display” (x page 22) for details.

54 - ENGLISH


Switching off the projector

3)

4)

1)

MENU LENS

SDI 1/2

VIDEO

RGB 1

RGB 2

DVI-D

HDMI

SDI 1/2

ENTER

SHUTTER

1)

2 )

2)

1) Press the power standby <v> button. f The [POWER OFF(STANDBY)] confirmation screen is displayed.

2) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

(Or press the power standby <v> button again.) f Projection of the image will stop, and the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> on the projector body lights in orange. (The fan keeps running.)

3) Wait until the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> on the projector body lights in red (and the fan stops) for 170 seconds.

4) Press the <OFF> side of the <MAIN POWER> switch to turn off the power.

Note f Do not switch on the projector and project images immediately after switching off the projector.

Turning on the power while the lamp is still hot may shorten the lamp life.

f For about 75 seconds after the projector is switched off and the luminous lamp cooling is started, the lamp indicators will not light up even if the power is switched on. Even after 75 seconds, the lamp may not light up if the projector is switched on. In such a case, after the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> lights in red, switch on the projector again.

f The projector consumes power even when the power standby <v> button is pressed and the projector is switched off if the main power of the projector is on.

When the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO], use of some functions is restricted, but the power consumption during standby can be conserved.

Direct power off function

Even if the main power <MAIN POWER> switch is turned <OFF> during projection or immediately after turning off the luminous lamp, the fan runs using internally stored power to cool the luminous lamp. When the projector is mounted on the ceiling or installed in an environment where the main power <MAIN POWER> switch of the projector cannot be easily turned <OFF>, the power can be turned off directly using the circuit breaker. It is also safe in case a power outage occurs or the power cord is pulled out immediately after the projector is switched off.

Note f If the projector was turned off by turning off the circuit breaker directly during projection last time, then the power indicator <ON (G)/

STANDBY (R)> will light in green a while after the circuit breaker is turned on, and then projection of the image will start.

f If cooled with the direct power off function, projection may take a longer time than usual to start when the projector is switched on the next time.

f Make sure that the fan is not running when packing the projector for transportation or storage.

ENGLISH - 55

Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Projecting

Projecting

Check the projection lens attachment (x page 46), external device connection (x page 48), power cord connection (x page 52), switch on the power (x page 53) to start projecting. Select the video for projection, and adjust appearance of the projected image.

Selecting the input signal

Select an input signal.

1) Press the input selection (<RGB1>, <RGB2>, <DVI-D>, <VIDEO>, <HDMI>, <SDI 1/2>) buttons on the control panel or the remote control.

f The image of the signal being input in the selected terminal is projected.

Attention f Images may not be projected properly depending on the external device, or the blu-ray disc or DVD disc, to be played back.

Set the [PICTURE] menu → [SYSTEM SELECTOR].

f Confirm the aspect ratio of the projection screen and the image, and switch to an optimum aspect ratio from the [POSITION] menu →

[ASPECT].

Adjusting the focus, zoom, and shift

If the projected image or the position is not correct when the positioning of the projector and the screen is correctly installed, adjust the focus, zoom, and shift.

Using the control panel

1) Press the <LENS> button on the control panel.

f Pressing the button changes the adjustment menu in the order of [FOCUS], [ZOOM], and [SHIFT].

2) Select each item and press asqw to adjust it.

Using the remote control

1) Press the lens (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, <SHIFT>) buttons on the remote control.

f <FOCUS> button: Adjusts focus.

f <ZOOM> button: Adjusts zoom.

f <SHIFT> button: Adjusts shift.

2) Select each item and press asqw to adjust it.

Caution

During the lens shift operation, do not insert your hand in any opening around the lens.

Your hand may be caught and result in injuries.

Note f The zoom adjust menu will not be displayed when the projection lens without the zoom function is attached.

f Use the projection lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE5, ET-D75LE50) with the lens position set to the home position. (x page 57) f The adjustment can be performed faster by pressing and holding asqw while adjusting the focus and shift.

f It is recommended that images be projected continuously for at least 30 minutes before the focus is adjusted.

f Only [FOCUS] is shown in yellow so that the displayed menu item can be recognized by color, even when the projector is not focused and displayed characters are unreadable. (Factory default)

The display color of [FOCUS] depends on the setting of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD DESIGN].

f When the power is switched off during focus and shift adjustment, lens calibration needs to be performed the next time the power is switched on. (x page 122) f When the main power is switched off during focus adjustment, lens calibration is performed automatically during the next focus adjustment.

f When the main power is switched off during shift adjustment, a lens calibration error screen will be displayed during the next shift adjustment. Execute the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [LENS CALIBRATION].

f When the lens calibration error is displayed even though [LENS CALIBRATION] was executed, ask your dealer to repair the unit.

56 - ENGLISH


Moving the lens to the home position

To move the lens to the home position, perform the following procedure.

1) While the [SHIFT] adjustment screen is displayed, press the <DEFAULT> button.

f The [HOME POSITION] screen is displayed.

LENS

HOME POSITION

ENTER

EXECUTE

MENU

CANCEL

2) While the [HOME POSITION] screen is displayed (for approximately five seconds), press the <ENTER> button.

f [PROGRESS] is displayed in the [HOME POSITION] screen, and the lens returns to the home position.

Note f The home position of the lens is the lens position when the lens is being replaced or when the projector is being stored, and it is not the optical center of the screen.

f You can also display the [HOME POSITION] screen by pressing the <LENS> button on the control panel or the <SHIFT> button on the remote control for at least three seconds.

Adjustment range by the lens position shift (optical shift)

Perform the lens position shift within the adjustment range.

The focus may change when the lens position is shifted out of the adjustment range. This is because the movement of the lens is restricted to protect the optical parts. Projection position can be adjusted with the optical axis shift based on the standard projection position in the respective range.


ET-D75LE1, ET-D75LE2, ET-D75LE3, ET-D75LE4,

ET-D75LE8, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20,

ET-D75LE30, ET-D75LE40

Projection screen width H

0.2 H 0.2 H

ET-D75LE6


0.15 H 0.15 H

PT-DZ13KU, PT-DZ10KU

Standard projection position


0.3 H 0.3 H

Standard projection position


0.2 H 0.2 H

PT-DS12KU

Standard projection position Standard projection position

ENGLISH - 57



ET-D75LE1, ET-D75LE2, ET-D75LE3, ET-D75LE4,

ET-D75LE8, ET-D75LE10, ET-D75LE20,

ET-D75LE30, ET-D75LE40


0.3 H 0.3 H

ET-D75LE6


0.2 H 0.2 H

PT-DW11KU

Standard projection position Standard projection position

Note f When the optional fixed-focus lens (Model No.: ET-D75LE5, ET-D75LE50) is attached, the shift cannot be adjusted.

Adjusting the lens mounter when the focus is unbalanced

Focus balance

Relationship between the tilt of the lens and the screen focus surface

When the projection lens is tilted in contrast with the image forming surface, tilting the front side (screen side) of the projection lens downwards

(in the direction of the dotted arrow line), the upper side of the screen focus surface will tilt inwards and the lower side will tilt outwards as shown in the example.

Projection lens

Image forming surface

Screen focus surface

How to adjust the focus balance (adjustment by tilting the lens mounter)

When the entire screen surface is not uniform even if the focus has been adjusted, the lens mounter has focus adjustment screws in three locations.

f Tool used: Hex driver or Allen wrench (diagonal 2.5 mm (3/32")) f The Allen wrench is included with the projection lens ET-D75LE6, ET-D75LE8.

Lens mounter structure

Focus adjustment screws (a), (b), and (c) can be turned to move the lens mount bracket back and forth.

Also, tightening the fixed screws locks the lens mount bracket in place so it does not move.

When a projection lens with a large weight is installed, or when the projector is installed on an inclination, the lens may tilt and the focus may become unbalanced. In these cases, perform adjustment by referring to the relationship between the adjustment location and adjustment screws.

58 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Projecting r

Front view diagram of the lens mounter (viewed from the screen side)

(a)

Lens mount bracket Fixing screws

(b)

Note f Focus adjustment screws (a), (b), and (c) are adjusted with the lens attached.

Adjustment procedure

(c) r

Relationship between the adjustment location and adjustment screws

(b)+(c)

(b) (c)

(a)

Adjustment location:

Location where the just focus point of the screen is in the inner side of the screen

(a)

(b)

(c)

When the just focus point of the screen in V up (top in the vertical direction) is in the inner side of the screen

Rotate counterclockwise

―

―

When the just focus point of the screen in V bottom (bottom in the vertical direction) is in the inner side of the screen

―



When the just focus point of the screen in H left (left in the horizontal direction) is in the inner side of the screen

―


―

When the just focus point of the screen in H right (right in the horizontal direction) is in the inner side of the screen

―

―


1) Press the <FOCUS> button on the remote control or the <LENS> button on the control panel to display the [FOCUS] adjustment menu.

2) Press s to shift the focus of the entire screen once.

3) Press a to stop on any part of the screen to be the first just focus point. f For the location where focus is shifted in this state, the just focus point is on the inner side of the screen.

4) Loosen the fixed screws in the position relative to the location where the focus is shifted the most

(the location where the just focus point is shifted the most towards the inner side in Step 2)) up to two rotations.

f Turn screws clockwise in two locations, or at least in one location to be adjusted.

5) Little by little, turn the focus adjustment screws corresponding to the locations counterclockwise and

stop where the image is in focus. (x page 58) f If the screws are turned counterclockwise, the tilt of the lens will change by moving the lens mount bracket of the lens mounter forward

(screen side), and in the projected image on the screen, the focus point in the opposite direction of the adjustment screws will move from the inner side of the screen to the outside.

ENGLISH - 59


6) Press the <SHIFT> button on the remote control or the <LENS> button on the control panel to display the [SHIFT] adjustment menu, and reset the screen position of the projected image on the screen surface back to an optimal state.

7) Perform focus adjustment again near the center of the screen and if it is still not enough, fine tune the amount of rotation of the adjustment screws.

8) When adjustments have been made, securely tighten the loosened fixing screws.

9) Adjust the focus again using the remote control.

60 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control

Operating with the remote control

Using the shutter function

If the projector is not used for a certain period of time during the meeting intermission, for example, it is possible to turn off the image temporarily.

button

1) Press the <SHUTTER> button.

f The image disappears.

f This operation can be also performed using the <SHUTTER> button on the control panel.

2) Press the <SHUTTER> button again.

f The image is displayed.

Note f The power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> will flash slowly in green while the shutter is closed .

f You can set the speed of shutter opening/closing via the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [SHUTTER SETTING].

Using the on-screen display function

Turn off the on-screen display function (no display) when you do not wish the viewers to see the on-screen display, such as the menu or the input terminal name.

button

1) Press the <ON SCREEN> button.

f The on-screen display disappears.

2) Press the <ON SCREEN> button again.

f The on-screen display appears.

Note f If you press the <MENU> button on the control panel for at least three seconds while the on-screen display is off (hidden), the on-screen display is turned on.

ENGLISH - 61

Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control

Switching the input signal

The input for projection can be switched.

button

1) Press the input selection (<RGB1>, <RGB2>, <DVI-D>, <VIDEO>, <HDMI>, <SDI 1/2>) buttons.

f This operation can be also performed using the buttons on the control panel.

<RGB1>

<RGB2>

<DVI-D>

<VIDEO>

<HDMI>

<SDI 1/2> *1




Switch the input to VIDEO.

Switch the input to HDMI.

(PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

Switches the input to SDI1 or SDI2. Switches to another input when one input has already been chosen. You can also fix the input selection to either SDI1 or SDI2 from the [SECURITY] menu →

[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].

(PT-DZ10KU)


*1 Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DZ10KU

Using the Status function

You can display the status of the projector.

button

1) Press the <STATUS> button.

f The [STATUS] screen is displayed.

STATUS

INPUT

SIGNAL NAME

SIGNAL FREQUENCY

PROJECTOR RUNTIME

LAMP1

LAMP2

INTAKE AIR TEMP.

OPTICS MODULE TEMP.

AROUND LAMP TEMP.

RGB2

XGA60-A8

48.36kHz/ 60.03Hz

140h

68h/ ON/

69h/ ON/

27°C/ 80°F

33°C/ 92°F

33°C/ 92°F

ENTER

SEND STATUS VIA E-MAIL

CHANGE

MENU

EXIT

Note f This can be displayed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [STATUS] (x page 119).

Using the Automatic setup function

The automatic setup function can be used to automatically adjust the resolution, clock phase, and image position when analog RGB signals consisting of bitmap images such as computer signals are being input, or to automatically adjust the image position when DVI-D/HDMI signals are input. Supplying images with bright white borders at the edges and high-contrast black and white characters is recommended when the system is in automatic adjustment mode.

Avoid supplying images that include halftones or gradation, such as photographs and computer graphics.

button

1) Press the <AUTO SETUP> button.

f [COMPLETE] is displayed when it has completed without any problem.

62 - ENGLISH

Chapter 3 Basic Operations — Operating with the remote control f This operation can be also performed using the <AUTO SETUP> button on the control panel.

Note f The clock phase may shift even if it has completed without any incident. In such cases, adjust the [POSITION] menu → [CLOCK PHASE]

(x page 81).

f If an image with blurred edges or a dark image is input, [INCOMPLETE] may appear or adjustment may not be performed properly even when [COMPLETE] appears. In this case, adjust the settings in the [ADVANCED MENU] menu → [INPUT RESOLUTION] (x page 86),

[POSITION] → [CLOCK PHASE] (x page 81), and [SHIFT] (x page 79).

f Adjust special signals according to the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [AUTO SETUP] (x page 98).

f Automatic adjustment may not work depending on the model of the computer.

f Automatic adjustment may not work for a synchronization signal of C-SY or SYNC ON GREEN.

f Images may be disrupted for a few seconds during automatic adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.

f Adjustment is required for each input signal.

f Automatic adjustment can be canceled by pressing the <MENU> button during the automatic adjustment operation.

f If the automatic setup function is used while moving images are being input, the adjustment may not be performed properly even for an RGB signal that can use automatic setup. [INCOMPLETE] may appear, or adjustment may not be finished properly even if [COMPLETE] appears.

Using the Function button

[P IN P], [SUB MEMORY], [SYSTEM SELECTOR], [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW], [FREEZE], [WAVEFORM MONITOR], [LENS MEMORY

LOAD], or [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] operations can be assigned to the <FUNC> button on the remote control so that it can be used as an easy shortcut button.

button

1) Press the <FUNC> button.

Note f [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] can only be assigned in PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU.

f Assignment of the function is performed from the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON] (x page 121).

Displaying the internal test pattern

The projector has eight types of internal test patterns to check the condition of the set. To display test patterns, perform the following steps.

button

1) Press the <TEST> button.

2) Press qw to select the test pattern.

Note f Setting is also available from the [TEST PATTERN] (x page 127) menu.

f Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reflected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input signal before performing various adjustments.

Changing the picture aspect ratio

You can toggle through aspect ratios to select the one that is appropriate for the input signal.

button

1) Press the <ASPECT> button.

f The setting will change each time you press the button.

f Refer to [ASPECT] (x page 79) for details.

ENGLISH - 63

Chapter 4 Settings

This chapter describes the settings and adjustments you can make using the on-screen menu.

64 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4 Settings — Menu navigation

Menu navigation

The on-screen menu (Menu) is used to perform various settings and adjustments of the projector.

Navigating through the menu

Operating procedure

button

1) Press the <MENU> button on the remote control or control panel.

f The [MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.

MAIN MENU

PICTURE

POSITION

ADVANCED MENU

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

3D SETTINGS

DISPLAY OPTION

PROJECTOR SETUP

P IN P

TEST PATTERN

SIGNAL LIST

SECURITY

NETWORK

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SUB MENU

2) Press as to select an item from the main menu. f The selected item is highlighted in yellow.

MAIN MENU

PICTURE

POSITION

ADVANCED MENU

DISPLAY LANGUAGE

3D SETTINGS

DISPLAY OPTION

PROJECTOR SETUP

P IN P

TEST PATTERN

SIGNAL LIST

SECURITY

NETWORK

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SUB MENU


f The sub-menu items of the selected main menu are displayed.

POSITION

SHIFT

ASPECT

ZOOM

CLOCK PHASE

GEOMETRY

0

DEFAULT

ENTER

MENU SELECT

SUB MENU

ENGLISH - 65


4) Press as to select a sub-menu, and press qw or the <ENTER> button to change or adjust settings. f Some items will switch in order as follows each time you press qw.

A B C f For some items, press qw to display an individual adjustment screen with a bar scale as shown below.

CONTRAST

ADJUST

0

Note f Pressing the <MENU> button while the menu screen is displayed returns to the previous menu.

f Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector. The menu items that cannot be adjusted or used are shown in gray characters, and they cannot be selected. [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] and [FRAME LOCK] may not be displayed depending on the input signal.

f Some items can be adjusted even if signals are not input.

f Individual adjustment screen is cleared automatically if no operation is performed for approximately five seconds.

f For menu items, refer to “Main menu” (x page 66) and “Sub-menu” (x page 67).

f The cursor color depends on the settings of the [DISPLAY OPTION] menu → [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] → [OSD DESIGN]. The selected item is displayed with the yellow cursor by the factory default.

f In the portrait setting, the menu is displayed sideways.

Resetting adjustment values to the factory default

If the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control is pressed, the values adjusted in the menu items are restored to the factory default settings.

button

1) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control.

CONTRAST

ADJUST

0

Note f You cannot reset all the settings to the factory default at a time.

f To reset all the settings adjusted in the sub-menu item to the factory default one at a time, execute [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu →

[INITIALIZE] (x page 124).

f Some items cannot be reset by pressing the <DEFAULT> button. Adjust each item manually.

f The triangular mark under the bar scale in the individual adjustment screen indicates the factory default setting. The position of the triangular mark varies according to the selected input signals.

Current adjustment value

Factory default setting

Main menu

The following items are in the main menu.

When a main menu item is selected, the screen changes to a sub-menu selection screen.

Main menu item

[PICTURE]

[POSITION]

[ADVANCED MENU]

[DISPLAY LANGUAGE]

[3D SETTINGS] *1

[DISPLAY OPTION]

66 - ENGLISH

Page

71

79

85

90

91

96


Main menu item

[PROJECTOR SETUP]

Page

108

[P IN P]

[TEST PATTERN]

[SIGNAL LIST]

125

127

128

[SECURITY] 131

[NETWORK] 135

*1 Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU

Sub-menu

The sub-menu of the selected main menu item is displayed, and you can set and adjust items in the sub-menu.

[PICTURE]

Sub-menu item

[PICTURE MODE]

[CONTRAST]

[BRIGHTNESS]

[COLOR]

[TINT]

[COLOR TEMPERATURE]

[GAMMA]

[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]

[SHARPNESS]

[NOISE REDUCTION]

[DYNAMIC IRIS]

[SYSTEM SELECTOR]

*1 Depends on the signal input.

Note f The factory default settings may vary depending on the picture mode.

Factory default

[STANDARD] *1

[0]

[0]

[0]

[0]

[DEFAULT]

[DEFAULT]

[OFF]

[+6]

[OFF]

[2]

[YP

B

P

R

] *1

75

76

76

77

72

74

75

Page

71

71

72

72

72

[POSITION]

Sub-menu item

[SHIFT]

[ASPECT]

[ZOOM]

[CLOCK PHASE]

[GEOMETRY] *2

[KEYSTONE] *3



*3 Only for PT-DW11KU

Factory default

―

[DEFAULT] *1

―

[0] *1

[OFF]

―

Page

79

79

80

81

81

84

[ADVANCED MENU]

Sub-menu item

[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]

[BLANKING]

[INPUT RESOLUTION]

Factory default

[AUTO] *1

―

―

Page

85

85

86

ENGLISH - 67


[CLAMP POSITION]

[EDGE BLENDING]

[FRAME RESPONSE]

[FRAME LOCK] *2

[RASTER POSITION]

Sub-menu item Factory default

[24] *1

[OFF]

[NORMAL]

[OFF]

―



Note f Sub-menu items and factory default settings differ depending on the selected input terminal.

Page

86

87

88

89

89

[DISPLAY LANGUAGE]

Details (x page 90)

[3D SETTINGS]


Sub-menu item

[3D SYSTEM SETTING]

[3D SYNC SETTING]

[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING]

[3D INPUT FORMAT]

[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]

[3D COLOR MATCHING]

[3D PICTURE BALANCE]

[DARK TIME SETTING]

[3D FRAME DELAY]

[3D TEST MODE]

[3D TEST PATTERN]

[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE]

[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS]

*1 Depends on the selected input terminal.

Factory default

[SINGLE]

—

—

[AUTO] *1

[NORMAL]

[SHARED 2D/3D]

—

[1.5 ms]

[0us]

[NORMAL]

—

[ON]

―

93

93

93

94

94

94

95

95

95

Page

91

91

92

92

[DISPLAY OPTION]

Sub-menu item

[COLOR MATCHING]

[LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION]

[SCREEN SETTING] *1

[AUTO SIGNAL]

[AUTO SETUP]

[RGB IN]

[DVI-D IN]

[HDMI IN]

[SDI IN] *1

[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]

[BACK COLOR]

[STARTUP LOGO]

[UNIFORMITY]

[SHUTTER SETTING]

[FREEZE]

[WAVEFORM MONITOR]

[CUT OFF]

*1 Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DZ10KU.

Factory default

[OFF]

[OFF]

―

[OFF]

―

―

―

―

―

―

[BLUE]

[DEFAULT LOGO]

―

―

―

[OFF]

—

Page

96

97

97

98

98

99

100

100

100

102

103

104

104

105

105

105

107

68 - ENGLISH


[PROJECTOR SETUP]

Sub-menu item

[PROJECTOR ID]

[PROJECTION METHOD]

[COOLING CONDITION]

[HIGH ALTITUDE MODE]

[LAMP SELECT]

[LAMP RELAY]

[LAMP POWER]

[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]

[STANDBY MODE]

[SCHEDULE]

[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]

[RS-232C]

[STATUS]

[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]

[REMOTE2 MODE]

[FUNCTION BUTTON]

[DATE AND TIME]

[LENS CALIBRATION]

[LENS MEMORY]

[SAVE ALL USER DATA]

[LOAD ALL USER DATA]

[INITIALIZE]

[SERVICE PASSWORD]

*1 In PT-DZ10KU, it is [NORMAL].

[P IN P]

Details (x page 125)

[TEST PATTERN]


[SIGNAL LIST]


[SECURITY]

Sub-menu item

[SECURITY PASSWORD]

[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]

[DISPLAY SETTING]

[TEXT CHANGE]

[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]

[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]

Factory default

[ALL]

[FRONT/FLOOR]

[AUTO]

[OFF]

[DUAL]

[OFF]

[HIGH] *1

―

[NORMAL]

[OFF]

[LAST USED]

―

―

[DISABLE]

[DEFAULT]

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

Factory default

[OFF]

―

[OFF]

―

―

―

Page

131

131

132

132

132

133

122

122

124

124

124

124

119

120

120

121

121

110

111

111

115

116

117

118

Page

108

108

109

109

109

ENGLISH - 69


[NETWORK]

Sub-menu item

[NETWORK SETUP]

[NETWORK CONTROL]

[NETWORK STATUS]

Factory default

―

―

―

Page

135

135

136

Note f Some items may not be adjusted or used for certain signal formats to be input to the projector.

The menu items that cannot be adjusted or used are shown in gray characters, and they cannot be selected.

f Sub-menu items and factory default settings differ depending on the selected input terminal.

70 - ENGLISH

[PICTURE] menu

Chapter 4 Settings — [PICTURE] menu

On the menu screen, select [PICTURE] from the main menu, and select an item from the submenu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen. f After selecting the item, press asqw to set.

[PICTURE MODE]

You can switch to the desired picture mode suitable for the image source and the environment in which the projector is used.

1) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE].

2) Press the qw. f The [PICTURE MODE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the item. f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[STANDARD]

[CINEMA]

[NATURAL]

[DICOM SIM.]

[DYNAMIC]

[GRAPHIC]

[USER]

The image becomes suitable for moving images in general.

The image becomes suitable for movie contents.

The image is sRGB compliant.

The image becomes similar to that of DICOM Part 14 Grayscale Standard.

The light output is maximized for use in bright areas.

The image becomes suitable for input from the personal computer.

Set any desired picture mode.

Note f The factory default picture mode is [GRAPHIC] for still image input signals and [STANDARD] for movie-based input signals.

f DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the

DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and should not be used for purposes such as diagnosis of display images.

f Press the <ENTER> button when each [PICTURE MODE] is selected to save as a specified value when a new signal is input. The data of all items except [SYSTEM SELECTOR] in the [PICTURE] menu is saved.

f In the factory default settings, [USER] is set to images that comply with the ITU-R BT.709 standard.

Changing the [USER] name


2) Press qw to select [USER].


f The [PICTURE MODE] detailed screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [PICTURE MODE NAME CHANGE], and press the <ENTER> button. f The [PICTURE MODE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

5) Press asqw to select the text, and press the <ENTER> button to enter the text.

6) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The picture mode name is changed.

[CONTRAST]

You can adjust the contrast of the colors.

1) Press as to select [CONTRAST].

ENGLISH - 71

Operation

Press the w button.

Press the q button.


2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [CONTRAST] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to adjust the level.

Adjustment

Brightens the screen and makes the color deeper.

Darkens the screen and makes the color lighter.

Attention f Adjust [BRIGHTNESS] first when you need to adjust the black level.

[BRIGHTNESS]

You can adjust the dark (black) part of the projected image.

1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [BRIGHTNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.


Operation

Press the w button.

Press the q button.

Adjustment

Increases the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.

Reduces the brightness of the dark (black) parts of the screen.

[COLOR]

You can adjust the color saturation of the projected image.

1) Press as to select [COLOR].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [COLOR] individual adjustment screen is displayed.


Operation

Press the w button.

Press the q button.

Deepens colors.

Weakens colors.

Adjustment

[TINT]

You can adjust the skin tone in the projected image.

1) Press as to select [TINT].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [TINT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.


Operation

Press the w button.

Press the q button.

Adjustment

Adjusts skin tone toward greenish color.

Adjusts skin tone toward reddish purple.

[COLOR TEMPERATURE]

You can switch the color temperature if the white areas of the projected image are bluish or reddish.

Adjusting with color temperature

1) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE].

72 - ENGLISH

Range of adjustment

-31 - +31


-31 - +31


-31 - +31


-31 - +31


2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.


[DEFAULT]

[USER1]

[USER2]

[3200K] - [9300K]

Factory default setting.

Adjusts white balance as desired. Refer to “Adjusting desired white balance” (x page 73) for details.

Allows you to set in increments of 100 K. Select so that images become natural.

Note f When [PICTURE MODE] (x page 71) is set to [USER] or [DICOM SIM.], [DEFAULT] cannot be selected.

f When [COLOR MATCHING] (x page 96) adjustment is set to other than [OFF], [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is fixed to [USER1].

f The color temperature numerical values are guidelines.

Adjusting desired white balance



3) Press qw to select [USER1] or [USER2].


f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE].


f The [WHITE BALANCE] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] or [WHITE BALANCE LOW].


f The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen or the [WHITE BALANCE LOW] screen is displayed.

9) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].


Item

[RED]

[GREEN]

[BLUE]

Operation

Press the w button.

Press the q button.

Press the w button.

Press the q button.

Press the w button.

Press the q button.

Adjustment

Deepens red.

Weakens red.

Deepens green.

Weakens green.

Deepens blue.

Weakens blue.


[WHITE BALANCE HIGH]: 0 - +255 (factory default is

+255)

[WHITE BALANCE LOW]: -127 - +127 (factory default is

0)

Note f Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the factory default setting.

Adjusting desired white balance based on existing color temperature settings



3) Press qw to select an item other than [DEFAULT], [USER1], or [USER2].

ENGLISH - 73



f The [CHANGE TO *****] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [USER1] or [USER2]. f The status of the color temperature changed is saved to the selected item.


f The confirmation screen is displayed.

7) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The [USER1] or [USER2] data is overwritten.

f If you press qw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the data will not be overwritten.

f The [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] screen is displayed.



Note f Adjust [COLOR TEMPERATURE] correctly. All colors will not be displayed properly unless adequate adjustment is made. If the adjustment does not look suitable, you can press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to return the setting for the selected item only to the factory default setting.

f When color temperature has been changed, the colors before and after the change will differ slightly.

Changing the name of [USER1] or [USER2]





f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE].


f The [COLOR TEMPERATURE NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.


8) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The name set to color temperature is changed.

Note f When a name is changed, display of [USER1], [USER2] is also changed.

[GAMMA]

You can switch gamma mode.

1) Press as to select [GAMMA].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.


[DEFAULT] *1

[USER1]

[USER2]

[DICOM SIM.]

Factory default setting.

Allows you to change the name.

Refer to “Changing the name of [USER1] or [USER2]” (x page 75) for details.

The picture becomes similar to that of DICOM standard.

74 - ENGLISH


[1.0]

[1.8]

[2.0] - [2.8] (increments of 0.1)

Set so that images become as you like. [2.0] - [2.8] can be set in increments of 0.1.

*1 When [PICTURE MODE] is set to [DYNAMIC], [USER], or [DICOM SIM.], [DEFAULT] cannot be selected.

Note f DICOM is an abbreviation of “Digital Imaging and Communication in Medicine” and is a standard for medical imaging devices. Although the

DICOM name is used, the projector is not a medical device, and should not be used for purposes such as diagnosis of display images.

Changing the name of [USER1] or [USER2]

1) Press as to select [GAMMA].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [GAMMA] individual adjustment screen is displayed.



f The [GAMMA] screen is displayed.


f The [GAMMA NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.


7) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The selected gamma name is changed.

Note f When a name is changed, display of [USER1], [USER2] is also changed.

[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]

You can correct the image to the optimal vividness even if it is projected under a bright light.

1) Press as to select [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] individual adjustment screen is displayed.


[OFF]

[1]

[2]

[3]

No correction.

Corrects the image to weaken vividness.

Corrects the image to medium vividness.

Corrects the image to high vividness.

[SHARPNESS]

You can adjust the sharpness of the projected image.

1) Press as to select [SHARPNESS].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [SHARPNESS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.


Operation

Press the w button.

Press the q button.

Contours become sharper.

Contours become softer.

Adjustment Range of adjustment

0 - +15

ENGLISH - 75

[OFF]

[1]

[2]

[3]


Note f If you press w while the adjustment value is [+15], the value will become [0]. If you press q while the adjustment value is [0], the value will become [+15].

[NOISE REDUCTION]

You can reduce noises when the input image is degraded and noise is occurring in the image signal.

1) Press as to select [NOISE REDUCTION].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [NOISE REDUCTION] individual adjustment screen is displayed.


No correction.

Slightly corrects the noise.

Moderately corrects the noise.

Strongly corrects the noise.

Attention f When this is set for an input signal with less noise, the image may look different from what it originally was. In such a case, set it to [OFF].

[DYNAMIC IRIS]

Aperture correction and signal compensation are performed automatically based on the image to result in an image of optimum contrast.

1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC IRIS].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [DYNAMIC IRIS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.


[OFF]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[USER]

No correction.

Slightly corrects aperture and compensate signals.

Moderately corrects aperture and signal.

Strongly corrects aperture and signal.

Set any desired correction.

Refer to “Adjusting desired correction amount” (x page 76) for details.

Adjusting desired correction amount

1) Press as to select [DYNAMIC IRIS].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [DYNAMIC IRIS] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to select [USER].


f The [DYNAMIC IRIS] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [AUTO IRIS], [MANUAL IRIS], or [DYNAMIC GAMMA].

6) Press qw to adjust the correction amount.

[AUTO IRIS]

(Automatic adjustment of aperture)

Item

[MANUAL IRIS]

(Fixed adjustment of aperture)

[OFF]

[1] - [255]

[OFF]

[1] - [255]

Adjustment

No correction.

Allows you to set in increments of 1. The larger the value, the stronger the correction.

No correction.

Allows you to set in increments of 1. The larger the value, the stronger the correction.

76 - ENGLISH

[DYNAMIC GAMMA]

(Adjustment of signal compensation)

Item


[OFF]

[1]

[2]

[3]

Adjustment

No correction.

Slightly compensates the signal.

Moderately compensates the signal.

Strongly compensates the signal.

Note f When [DYNAMIC GAMMA] is set to [3], the contrast will be maximized.

f Brightness control and iris operate simultaneously, but the iris is fully open and does not operate while a brightness measurement is performed.

[SYSTEM SELECTOR]

The projector will automatically detect the input signal, but you can set the system method manually when an unstable signal is input. Set the system method matching the input signal.

1) Press as to select [SYSTEM SELECTOR].


3) Press as to select a system format. f Available system formats vary depending on the input signal.

Terminal

<VIDEO IN> terminal, <G/

Y>/<B/P

B

/C> terminals

<RGB 1 IN> terminal, <RGB 2

IN> terminal

<DVI-D IN> terminal

<HDMI IN> terminal

<SDI IN 1> terminal, <SDI

IN 2> terminal (only for

PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

<SDI IN> terminal (only for

PT-DZ10KU)

System format

Select [AUTO], [NTSC], [NTSC4.43], [PAL], [PAL-M], [PAL-N], [SECAM], or [PAL60].

Set it to [AUTO] normally. (Setting [AUTO] will automatically select [NTSC], [NTSC4.43], [PAL],

[PAL-M], [PAL-N], [SECAM], or [PAL60].)

Switch the setting to the signal method for the TV used.

480i, 576i, or 576p signal Select [RGB] or [YC

B

C

R

].

VGA60 or 480p signal Select [VGA60], [480p YC

Other movie-based signals Select [RGB] or [YP

B

P

R

].

B

C

R

], or [480p RGB].

480i, 576i, 480p, or 576p signal

480i, 576i, 480p, or 576p signal

Select [RGB] or [YC

B

C

R

].

Other movie-based signals Select [RGB] or [YP

B

P

R

].

Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YC

B

C

R

].

Other movie-based signals Select [AUTO], [RGB], or [YP

B

P

R

].

Single link

Dual link

During SDI1 (SDI) input, select [AUTO], [480i YC

YC

B

C

R

], [720/50p YP

B

[1080/24p YP

B

[1080/30p YP

B

[1080/50p YP

B

P

P

R

], [1080/50i YP

B

P

R

R

P

R

], [720/60p YP

], [1080/24sF YP

], [1080/60p YP

B

B

], [1035/60i YP

], [1080/25p YP

B

P

R

], [1080/60i YP

B

P

P

R

R

B

P

R

], [1080/24p RGB],

[1080/24sF RGB], [1080/25p RGB], [1080/30p RGB],

[1080/50i RGB], or [1080/60i RGB].

During SDI2 input, select [AUTO], [480i YC

B

YC

B

C

R

], [720/50p YP

[1080/24p YP

B

[1080/30p YP

B

P

P

R

R

B

P

R

], [720/60p YP

], [1080/24sF YP

], [1080/50i YP

B

P

B

R

P

R

B

P

R

C

R

B

C

R

P

], [1080/25p YP

], or [1080/60i YP

], [576i

R

B

B

P

R

],

B

P

R

],

],

], [576i

], [1035/60i YP

B

P

P

P

R

R

],

].

R

],

Select [AUTO], [1080/24p RGB], [2K/24p RGB], [2K/24p XYZ],

[1080/24sF RGB], [2K/24sF RGB], [2K/24sF XYZ], [1080/25p RGB],

[1080/30p RGB], [1080/50i RGB], or [1080/60i RGB].

Select [AUTO], [480i YC

B

C

R

], [576i YC

B

C

R

], [720/50p YP

B

P

R

], [720/60p YP

B

P

R

[1080/24p YP

B

P

R

], [1080/24sF YP

B

P

R

[1080/60i YP

B

P

R

], [1080/50p YP

B

P

R

], [1080/25p YP

], [1080/60p YP

B

B

P

R

P

R

], [1080/30p YP

B

[1080/25p RGB], [1080/30p RGB], [1080/50i RGB], or [1080/60i RGB].

P

R

], [1035/60i YP

B

], [1080/50i YP

B

P

R

], [1080/24p RGB], [1080/24sF RGB],

P

R

],

],


Note f Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 175) for the types of video signals that can be used with the projector.

f This may not function properly for some connected external devices.

ENGLISH - 77


sRGB-compliant video

sRGB is an international standard (IEC61966-2-1) for color reproduction defined by IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission).

Set according to the following steps to reproduce more faithful, sRGB compliant colors.

1) Set [COLOR MATCHING] adjustments to [OFF].

f Refer to [COLOR MATCHING] (x page 96).

2) Display the [PICTURE] menu.

f Refer to “[PICTURE] menu” (x page 71).


4) Press qw to set [NATURAL].

5) Press as to select [COLOR].

6) Press the <DEFAULT> button on the remote control to set the factory default setting.

7) Follow Steps 5) to 6) to set [TINT], [COLOR TEMPERATURE], [GAMMA], and [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT

VIEW] to the factory default settings.

Note f sRGB is available for RGB signal input only.

78 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4 Settings — [POSITION] menu

[POSITION] menu

On the menu screen, select [POSITION] from the main menu, and select an item from the submenu.


[SHIFT]

Move the image position vertically or horizontally if the image position projected on the screen is shifted even when the relative position of the projector and the screen is installed correctly.

1) Press as to select [SHIFT].


f The [SHIFT] screen is displayed.

3) Press asqw to adjust the position.

Orientation Operation Adjustment

Press the a button.

The image position moves up.

Vertical (up and down) adjustment

Press the s button.

The image position moves down.

Press the w button.

The image position moves to the right.

Horizontal (right and left) adjustment

Press the q button.

The image position moves to the left.

Note f For the portrait setting, image position is moved horizontally when “Vertical (up and down) adjustment” is made. Image position is moved vertically when “Horizontal (right and left) adjustment” is made.

[ASPECT]

You can switch the aspect ratio of the image.

The aspect ratio is switched within the screen range selected in [SCREEN SETTING]. Set [SCREEN SETTING] first. (x page 97)

1) Press as to select [ASPECT].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [ASPECT] individual adjustment screen is displayed.


ENGLISH - 79


[DEFAULT]

[VID AUTO] *1

[AUTO] *2

[THROUGH]

[16:9]

[4:3]

[H FIT]

[V FIT]

[HV FIT]

Displays images without changing the aspect ratio of the input signals.

The projector identifies the video ID (VID) embedded in the video signals and displays the image by automatically switching the screen sizes between 4:3 and 16:9. This function is effective for NTSC signals.

The projector identifies the video ID (VID) embedded in the video signals and displays the image by automatically switching the screen sizes between 4:3 and 16:9. This function is effective for 480i/480p signals.

Displays images without changing the resolution of the input signals.

Displays images with the aspect ratio converted to 16:9 when standard signals are input *3 . Display images without changing the aspect ratio when wide-screen signals are input *4 .

Displays images without changing the aspect ratio when standard signals are input *3 . Displays images without changing the aspect ratio so that the images will fit in the 4:3 screen when wide-screen signals are input *2 .

Displays images using the entire width of the screen. When signals have the aspect ratio vertically longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT], the images are displayed with the top and bottom parts cut off.

Displays images using the entire height of the screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When signals have the aspect ratio horizontally longer than the aspect ratio of the screen selected in

[SCREEN FORMAT], the images are displayed with the right and left parts cut off.

Displays images in the entire screen range selected in [SCREEN FORMAT]. When the aspect ratio of the input signals differs from that of the screen range, the images are displayed with the aspect ratio converted to that of the screen selected in [SCREEN FORMAT].

*1 For video signals and Y/C signals (NTSC) only

*2 For RGB (480i or 480p) signal input only

*3 Standard signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 4:3 or 5:4.

*4 Wide-screen signals are input signals with an aspect ratio of 16:10, 16:9, 15:9 or 15:10.

Note f Some size modes are not available for certain types of input signals. [DEFAULT] cannot be selected for video signal, Y/C signal (NTSC), or

RGB (480i, 480p) signal.

f If an aspect ratio which is different from the aspect ratio for the input signals is selected, the images will appear differently from the originals.

Be careful of this when selecting the aspect ratio.

f If using the projector in places such as cafes or hotels to display programs for a commercial purpose or for public presentation, note that adjusting the aspect ratio or using the zoom function to change the screen images may be an infringement of the rights of the original copyright owner for that program under copyright protection laws. Take care when using a function of the projector such as the aspect ratio adjustment and zoom function.

f If conventional (normal) 4:3 images which are not wide-screen images are displayed on a wide screen, the edges of the images may not be visible or they may become distorted. Such images should be viewed as with an aspect ratio of 4:3 in the original format intended by the creator of the images.

[ZOOM]

You can adjust the image size.

When [ASPECT] is set to other than [DEFAULT] and [THROUGH]

1) Press as to select [ZOOM].


f The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].

4) Press qw to switch the item.

[OFF]

[ON]

Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.

Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the same magnification.

5) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL]. f If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].

6) Press qw to adjust.

Note f When [ASPECT] is set to [THROUGH], [ZOOM] cannot be adjusted.

80 - ENGLISH


When [ASPECT] is set to [DEFAULT]

1) Press as to select [ZOOM].


f The [ZOOM] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [MODE].


[INTERNAL]

[FULL]

Enlarges the size within the aspect range set with [SCREEN FORMAT].

Enlarges or reduces the size using the entire display area set with [SCREEN FORMAT].

5) Press as to select [INTERLOCKED].


[OFF]

[ON]

Sets the [VERTICAL] and [HORIZONTAL] zoom ratio.

Uses [BOTH] to set zoom ratio. Image can be enlarged or reduced vertically and horizontally at the same magnification.

7) Press as to select [VERTICAL] or [HORIZONTAL]. f If [ON] is selected, select [BOTH].


Note f When [ASPECT] is not set to [DEFAULT], [MODE] is not displayed.

[CLOCK PHASE]

You can adjust to achieve an optimal image when there is a flickering image or smeared outlines.

1) Press as to select [CLOCK PHASE].

2) Press qw or the <ENTER> button. f The [CLOCK PHASE] individual adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to adjust. f Adjustment value will change between [0] and [+31]. Adjust so that the amount of interference is at a minimum.

Note f Certain signals may not be adjustable.

f Optimal value may not be achieved if the output from the input computer is unstable.

f Optimal value may not be achieved when there is a shift in the total dot numbers.

f [CLOCK PHASE] can be adjusted only when a signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.

f [CLOCK PHASE] cannot be adjusted when a digital signal is input.

f If you press w while the adjustment value is [+31], the value will become [0]. If you press q while the adjustment value is [0], the value will become [+31].

[GEOMETRY]


You can correct various types of distortion in a projected image.

Unique image processing technology enables projection of a square image on a special screen shape.

1) Press as to select [GEOMETRY].


[OFF]

[KEYSTONE]

Does not perform geometric adjustment.

Adjusts any trapezoidal distortion in the projected image.

[CORNER CORRECTION] Adjusts any distortion in the four corners of the projected image.

[CURVED] Adjusts any curved distortion in the projected image.

ENGLISH - 81


[PC-1] *1

[PC-2] *1

[PC-3] *1

Uses the computer to perform geometric adjustment.

*1 Advanced skills are necessary to use a computer to control geometric adjustment. Consult your dealer. Up to three geometric adjustments performed using the computer can be saved.

Setting [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED]


2) Press qw to select [KEYSTONE] or [CURVED].


f The [GEOMETRY:KEYSTONE] or [GEOMETRY:CURVED] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select the item to adjust.


[KEYSTONE]

[LENS THROW RATIO]

Set the throw ratio for the lens used.

[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]

[VERTICAL BALANCE] [HORIZONTAL BALANCE]

Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the vertical direction.

Adjust the setting according to the lens shift range in the horizontal direction.

[CURVED]

[LENS THROW RATIO]

Set the throw ratio for the lens used.

[VERTICAL KEYSTONE] [HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]

[VERTICAL ARC] [HORIZONTAL ARC]

82 - ENGLISH

[VERTICAL BALANCE]


[CURVED]

[HORIZONTAL BALANCE]

[MAINTAIN ASPECT RATIO]

Select [ON] to correct while keeping the aspect ratio.

Setting [CORNER CORRECTION]


2) Press qw to select [CORNER CORRECTION].


f The [GEOMETRY:CORNER CORRECTION] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select the item to adjust, and press the <ENTER> button.

5) Press asqw to adjust.

[UPPER LEFT] [UPPER RIGHT]

[CORNER CORRECTION]

[LOWER LEFT] [LOWER RIGHT]

[LINEARITY]

Horizontal direction Vertical direction

Note f The menu or logo may run off the screen when [GEOMETRY] is set.

f If [EDGE BLENDING] (x page 87) adjustment and [GEOMETRY] are used together, correct edge blending adjustment may not be possible in certain environments.

f The optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) can be used to expand the correctable range. To purchase the product, consult your dealer.

ENGLISH - 83


[KEYSTONE]

(Only for PT-DW11KU)

You can correct the trapezoidal distortion that occurs when the projector is installed tilted or when the screen is tilted.

1) Press as to select [KEYSTONE].


3) Press as to select the item to adjust.


[KEYSTONE] [SUB KEYSTONE]

[LINEARITY]

Note f The menu or logo may run off the screen when adjustments are performed with [KEYSTONE].

f Correcting up to ±40° for the tilt in the vertical direction is available for adjustments with [KEYSTONE]. However, the image quality will degrade and it will get harder to focus with more correction. Install the projector so that the correction will be as small as possible. (±22° when using projection lens ET-D75LE5/ET-D75LE50, or ±28° when using the projection lens ET-D75LE6.) f Screen size will also change when [KEYSTONE] is used to perform various adjustments.

f When the keystone is corrected with [KEYSTONE], the edge blending cannot be adjusted together.

f Aspect ratio of the image size may shift depending on the correction or lens zoom value.

f For the portrait setting, keystone is corrected for horizontal tilt.

84 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4 Settings — [ADVANCED MENU] menu

[ADVANCED MENU] menu

On the menu screen, select [ADVANCED MENU] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.


[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]

You can increase the vertical resolution and enhance the image quality by performing cinema processing when the PAL (or SECAM) 576i signal, the NTSC 480i signal, and 1080/50i, 1080/60i are input.

1) Press as to select [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY].


[AUTO]

[OFF]

[25p FIXED]

[30p FIXED]

Performs automatic detection and cinema processing. (Factory default)

Does not perform cinema processing.

Only during 576i or 1080/50i signal input

Only during 480i or 1080/60i signal input

Performs forced cinema processing (2:2 pulldown).

Note f In [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY], the picture quality will degrade when a signal other than the 2:2 pulldown is set as [25p FIXED] or [30p

FIXED]. (Vertical resolution will degrade.) f When [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to [FAST], [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] cannot be set.

[BLANKING]

You can adjust the blanking width if there are noises at the edge of the screen or the image is slightly running out from the screen while an image from the VCR or other devices are projected.

1) Press as to select [BLANKING].


f The [BLANKING] adjustment screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT]. f When [CUSTOM MASKING] is set to an item ([PC-1], [PC-2], or [PC-3]) other than [OFF], the blanking width can be adjusted to any shape using the computer. Up to three blanking settings adjusted using the computer can be saved.

To use the [CUSTOM MASKING] function, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required. To purchase the product, consult your dealer.

4) Press qw to adjust the blanking width.

ENGLISH - 85

Blanking correction Item


Operation

Press the q button.

The blanking zone moves upward.

Adjustment

Top of the screen [UPPER]

Press the w button.

The blanking zone moves downward.

Press the w button.

The blanking zone moves upward.

Bottom of the screen

[LOWER]

Press the q button.

The blanking zone moves downward.

Left side of the screen

[LEFT]

Right side of the screen

[RIGHT]

Press the w button.

The blanking zone moves to the right.

Press the q button.

The blanking zone moves to the left.

Press the q button.

The blanking zone moves to the right.

Press the w button.

The blanking zone moves to the left.


PT-DZ13KU, PT-DZ10KU:

Top to bottom 0 - 599

PT-DS12KU: Top to bottom

0 - 524

PT-DW11KU: Top to bottom

0 - 383

PT-DZ13KU, PT-DZ10KU:

Left to right 0 - 959

PT-DS12KU: Left to right

0 - 699

PT-DW11KU: Left to right

0 - 682

[INPUT RESOLUTION]

You can adjust to achieve an optimal image when there is a flickering image or smeared outlines.

1) Press as to select [INPUT RESOLUTION].


f The [INPUT RESOLUTION] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [TOTAL DOTS], [DISPLAY DOTS], [TOTAL LINES], or [DISPLAY LINES], and press qw to adjust it.

f Values corresponding to the signal being input are displayed automatically for each item. Increase or decrease the displayed values and adjust to the optimal point viewing the screen when there are vertical stripes or sections are missing from the screen.

Note f Previously mentioned vertical banding will not occur with all white signal input.

f The image may be disrupted while performing the adjustment, but it is not a malfunction.

f [INPUT RESOLUTION] can be adjusted only when an RGB signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.

f Certain signals may not be adjustable.

[CLAMP POSITION]

You can adjust the optimal point when the black part of the image is blunt or it has turned green.

1) Press as to select [CLAMP POSITION].


Status

The black part is blunt.

The black part is green.

Rough guide for optimal value

The point where bluntness of the black part improves the most is the optimal value.

The point where the green part becomes black, and the bluntness has improved is the optimal value.


1 - 255

Note f [CLAMP POSITION] can be adjusted only when a signal is input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal.

f Certain signals may not be adjustable.

86 - ENGLISH


[EDGE BLENDING]

The edge blending function allows multiple projector images to be seamlessly overlapped by using the inclination of the brightness at the overlapped area.

1) Press as to select [EDGE BLENDING].


[OFF]

[ON]

[USER]

Sets the edge blending function to off.

Use the setting value of the internal distortion of the set for the inclination of the edge blending area.

Use the user-setting value for the inclination of the edge blending area. (Configuration/registration requires separate software. Consult your dealer.) f To adjust edge blending, proceed to Step 3).

3) When [ON] or [USER] is selected, press the <ENTER> button.

f The [EDGE BLENDING] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to specify the location to be corrected. f When joining at top: Set [UPPER] to [ON] f When joining at bottom: Set [LOWER] to [ON] f When joining at left: Set [LEFT] to [ON] f When joining at right: Set [RIGHT] to [ON]

5) Press qw to switch between [ON] and [OFF].

6) Press as to select [START] and [WIDTH].

7) Press qw to adjust the starting position and correction width.

8) Press as to select [MARKER].

9) Press qw to switch to [ON]. f A marker for image position adjustment is displayed. The position where the red and green lines overlap for the projectors to be joined will be the optimal point. Make sure to set the correction width for the projectors to be joined with the same value. Optimal joining is not possible with projectors that have different correction widths.

The optimal point is the point at which these lines overlap.

Green line

Red line

10) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST].


f The [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen is displayed.

f By setting [AUTO TESTPATTERN] on the [EDGE BLENDING] screen to [ON], the black test pattern is displayed when you enter the

[BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen.

12) Press as to select [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].


f The [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] screen is displayed.

f If [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF], [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually.

14) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting. f Once the adjustment is completed, press the <MENU> button to return to the [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] screen.

ENGLISH - 87


15) Press as to select [UPPER], [LOWER], [LEFT], or [RIGHT] in [BLACK BORDER WIDTH].

16) Press qw to set the region (width) of the [BLACK BORDER WIDTH] adjustment. f When PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, or PT-DZ10KU is used, proceed to Step 17).

f When PT-DW11KU is used, proceed to Step 19).

17) Press as to select [UPPER KEYSTONE AREA], [LOWER KEYSTONE AREA], [LEFT KEYSTONE

AREA], or [RIGHT KEYSTONE AREA].

18) Press qw to adjust the tilt of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK

BORDER LEVEL].

19) Press as to select [BLACK BORDER LEVEL].


f The [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] screen is displayed.

f If [INTERLOCKED] is set to [OFF], [RED], [GREEN], and [BLUE] can be adjusted individually.

21) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting.

Projection range

[BLACK BORDER WIDTH] (Right)

Edge blending [WIDTH] (Right)

[NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL]

[MARKER] (Red)

Edge blending [START] (Right)

([MARKER] (Green))

[OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] (Right)

[BLACK BORDER LEVEL]

Note f [BRIGHTNESS ADJUST] is a function that makes the increased brightness in black level of the overlapping image area difficult to notice when [EDGE BLENDING] is used to configure multiple screens. The optimal point of correction is set by adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED

BLACK LEVEL] so the black level of the overlapping image area will be the same level as the non-overlapping area. If the border area of the part where the image is overlapping and the non-overlapping part gets brighter after adjusting [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL], adjust the width of the top, bottom, left, or right. Adjust [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] when the width adjustment makes only the border area darker.

f The joining part may look discontinuous depending on the position you are looking from when a screen with high gain or rear screen is used.

f When configuring multiple screens using both horizontal and vertical edge blending, adjust [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] first before making adjustments in Step 12). Adjustment method is same as the procedure of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].

f If only horizontal or vertical edge blending is used, set all items in [OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] to 0.

f [AUTO TESTPATTERN] settings change together with the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] of [COLOR MATCHING].

f Adjustment of the tilt of the border between [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] and [BLACK BORDER LEVEL] is a function to perform the adjustment of [GEOMETRY] (x page 81) together with the edge blending. If [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL] is tilted by correcting the keystone from [KEYSTONE] in [GEOMETRY], perform Steps 17) and 18) to adjust the edge blending according to the shape of [NON-OVERLAPPED BLACK LEVEL].

f When the keystone is corrected with [KEYSTONE], the edge blending cannot be adjusted together. (Only for PT-DW11KU)

[FRAME RESPONSE]

Set image frame delay.

1) Press as to select [FRAME RESPONSE].


[NORMAL]

[FAST] *1

[FIXED] *2

Standard setting.

Simplifies the image processing to reduce image frame delay.

Sets image frame delay to be constant regardless of the image position or magnification.

*1 When input signals are other than interlaced signals, [FAST] cannot be set.

*2 Only when movie-based signals and still image signals with the vertical scanning frequency of 50 Hz or 60 Hz are input

Note f When [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to [FAST], picture quality deteriorates. Also, [DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY] cannot be set.

f [FRAME RESPONSE] cannot be set during P IN P.

88 - ENGLISH


[FRAME LOCK]


Set this to view 3D display when the vertical scanning frequency of the signal is 25 Hz, 50 Hz, and 100 Hz.

1) Press as to select [FRAME LOCK].


[OFF]

[ON]

Decreases the flickering of the display.

Synchronizes the display to the vertical scanning frequency of the input signal.

Note f [FRAME LOCK] is not displayed when the vertical scanning frequency of a signal other than the above is input or 2D images are displayed.

f The screen may flicker when [FRAME LOCK] is set to [ON].

f The display may look discontinuous when [FRAME LOCK] is set to [OFF].

[RASTER POSITION]

This will allow the position of the image to move within the display area arbitrarily when the input image is not using the whole display area.

1) Press as to select [RASTER POSITION].


f The [RASTER POSITION] screen is displayed.

3) Press asqw to adjust the position.

ENGLISH - 89

Chapter 4 Settings — [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu

[DISPLAY LANGUAGE] menu

On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY LANGUAGE] from the main menu, and display the submenu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen. f Press as to select a language, and press the <ENTER> button to set.

Changing the display language

You can select the language of the on-screen display.

INITIAL SETTING

ENTER

SELECT

SET f Various menus, settings, adjustment screens, control button names, etc., are displayed in the selected language.

f The language can be changed to English, German, French, Spanish, Italian, Portuguese, Japanese, Chinese, Russian, or Korean.

Note f The on-screen display language of the projector is set to English by default and when [ALL USER DATA] (x page 124) in [INITIALIZE] is executed.

90 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4 Settings — [3D SETTINGS] menu

[3D SETTINGS] menu


On the menu screen, select [3D SETTINGS] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.


[3D SYSTEM SETTING]

Set a picture display method for use during 3D signal input as necessary for the 3D system in use.

1) Press as to select [3D SYSTEM SETTING].


[SINGLE]

[DUAL (LEFT)]

[DUAL (RIGHT)]

During 3D signal input, sequential frames of images for the right eye and images for the left eye are alternately displayed.

Only images for the left eye are displayed during 3D signal input.

Only images for the right eye are displayed during 3D signal input.

Note f When 2D images are input, 2D images are displayed regardless of [3D SYSTEM SETTING] settings.

[3D SYNC SETTING]

Set the way in which the <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal and the <3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal will be used.

Attention f Before connecting external devices to the <3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal and the <3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal using cables, complete the

[3D SYNC MODE] setting and confirm that the external devices to be connected are turned off.

f Changing [3D SYNC MODE] while the cables are connected may result in malfunctions of the projector or the connected external devices.

1) Press as to select [3D SYNC SETTING].


f The precaution message related to [3D SYNC SETTING] is displayed.


f The [3D SYNC SETTING] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [3D SYNC MODE].


[3D SYNC MODE]

[OFF]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

Items set in [3D SYNC1]

Not used.

3D trigger output

3D trigger output

Stereo synch input

Stereo synch input

Stereo synch input

Frame synch input

Frame synch input

Frame synch input

3D trigger output


Not used.

Stereo synch output

3D trigger output

Through 3D SYNC1

Stereo synch output

3D trigger output

Through 3D SYNC1

Stereo synch output

3D trigger output

Frame synch output

ENGLISH - 91

[3D SYNC MODE]

[10]

[11]



Stereo synch output

3D IR TRANSMITTER (+) output


Frame synch output

3D IR TRANSMITTER (-) output

6) When [1], [4], [7], or [10] is selected, press as to select [STEREO SYNC OUTPUT DELAY], and press qw to set the amount of delay output.

[0us] - [25 000 us] Allows you to set in increments of 10 us.

f To synchronize multiple projectors to display 3D images, use a frame synch input and output.

Select [9] or [10] for the first projector.

Select [6], [7], or [8] for the second and subsequent projectors.

f Stereo synchronization is a signal having a 50 % duty cycle where High is for the left eye and Low is for the right eye.

f “H” is output to the 3D image display and “L” is output to the 2D image display from the terminal for which 3D trigger output is selected.

Note f [11] or [3D SYNC MODE] is the setting when the 3D IR transmitter TY-3DTRW of Panasonic is used with the projector. Consult your dealer regarding the connection method.

[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING]

Set this item to input and use 3D video signals of the simultaneous system.

1) Press as to select [3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING].


f The [3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [LEFT:RGB1 RIGHT:RGB2], [LEFT:HDMI RIGHT:DVI-D], or [LEFT:SDI1 RIGHT:SDI2]

(only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU).


[OFF]

[AUTO]

Cannot use 3D simultaneous.

Displays 3D images of the simultaneous system.

Note f When set to [AUTO], 3D images are displayed when the same 3D compatible signals are entered to each input. However, the P IN P status during P IN P is maintained.


f Certain signals may not function properly.

[3D INPUT FORMAT]

Set the 3D format for the image signals being input.

Set a 3D format that matches the input signal.

1) Press as to select [3D INPUT FORMAT].


f The [3D INPUT FORMAT] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select a 3D format.

[AUTO] *1

[NATIVE]

[SIMULTANEOUS] *2

[SIDE BY SIDE]

[TOP AND BOTTOM]

[LINE BY LINE] *3

[FRAME SEQUENTIAL] *4

Automatically detects 3D format of input image signals and displays images.

Forcibly displays 2D images regardless of input image signals.

Forcibly displays 3D images in simultaneous system regardless of input video signals.

Forcibly displays 3D images in side by side format regardless of input image signals.

Forcibly displays 3D images in top and bottom format regardless of input image signals.

Forcibly displays 3D images in line by line system regardless of input video signals.

Forcibly displays 3D images in frame sequential format regardless of input image signals.

*1 During DVI-D or HDMI input only

*2 During 3G-SDI level B input only

*3 Only while signals other than interlaced signals are input

*4 Only while progressive signals with the vertical scanning frequency of 100 Hz or 120 Hz are input to the <RGB1>/<RGB2>/<DVI-D> terminals


92 - ENGLISH


Note f When set to [AUTO], [SIMULTANEOUS], [SIDE BY SIDE], [TOP AND BOTTOM], [LINE BY LINE], or [FRAME SEQUENTIAL], 3D images are not displayed in [3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING]. In [AUTO], however, this only occurs when 3D format can be recognized.


[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]

Display images by inverting the timing of horizontal image switching. Change the settings when there is something wrong with the 3D image being viewed.

1) Press as to select [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP].


[NORMAL]

[SWAPPED]

Do not change the [NORMAL] setting if the 3D images are displayed correctly.

Select this when left and right 3D images are swapped to be displayed.

Note f This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to other than [SINGLE].

[3D COLOR MATCHING]

Switches the color matching correction data applied to the displayed image.

1) Press as to select [3D COLOR MATCHING].


[SHARED 2D/3D]

[SEPARATE 2D/3D]

2D signals and 3D signals use the same correction data.

2D signals and 3D signals use different correction data.

Note f Switch the setting of [COLOR MATCHING] (x page 96) while inputting the signal to be adjusted.

[3D PICTURE BALANCE]

Correct a shift when the brightness or color differ in the right eye and left eye images.

1) Press as to select [3D PICTURE BALANCE].


f The [3D PICTURE BALANCE] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select an item, and press qw to adjust the setting. f Correct the setting value parts of the right eye image based on the left eye image.

f For [3D WAVEFORM MONITOR], the left eye and right eye images are divided and displayed in a waveform on the left and right.

[CONTRAST]

[WHITE BALANCE HIGH

RED]


GREEN]


BLUE]

[BRIGHTNESS]

Adjusts the contrast of the colors.

Adjusts the high red white balance.

Adjusts the high green white balance.

Adjusts the high blue white balance.

Adjusts the dark (black) part of the projected image.

[WHITE BALANCE LOW RED] Adjusts the low red white balance.

[WHITE BALANCE LOW

GREEN]

Adjusts the low green white balance.

[WHITE BALANCE LOW

BLUE]

[COLOR]

[TINT]

[CLOCK PHASE]

Adjusts the low blue white balance.

Adjusts the color saturation of the projected image.

Adjusts the skin tone in the projected image.

Adjusts when the screen flickers or outline blurs.

ENGLISH - 93

[3D WAVEFORM MONITOR]


[OFF]

[ON]

Hides the 3D waveform monitor.

Displays the 3D waveform monitor.

Note f The [CLOCK PHASE] setting is enabled at simultaneous input of RGB1 and RGB2 to adjust the right eye image.

f This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to other than [SINGLE].

f This is disabled when [3D TEST PATTERN] is displayed.

f This is disabled when [3D TEST MODE] is set to other than [NORMAL] or [SIDE BY SIDE].

f The 3D waveform monitor is displayed only when the [3D PICTURE BALANCE] screen is displayed.

f The normal waveform monitor cannot be displayed in 3D images.

[DARK TIME SETTING]

Set the black display period to be displayed between the right eye image and the left eye image as necessary for the 3D system used.

1) Press as to select [DARK TIME SETTING].


[0.5 ms]

[1.0 ms]

[1.5 ms]

[2.0 ms]

[2.5 ms]

[2.7 ms]

Set so that the 3D setting is displayed correctly.

Note f This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to other than [SINGLE].

f When the setting does not correspond to the 3D system in use, phenomenon such as increased crosstalk and darkening of displayed images may occur.

[3D FRAME DELAY]

Adjust the timing of the left-right switch of an image.

1) Press as to select [3D FRAME DELAY].


[0us] - [25 000 us] Allows you to set in increments of 10 us.

f The adjustment range depends on the input signal.

[3D TEST MODE]

Set the image display system for use with 3D system adjustments.

1) Press as to select [3D TEST MODE].


[NORMAL]

[SIDE BY SIDE]

[LEFT/LEFT]

[RIGHT/RIGHT]

[LEFT/BLACK]

[BLACK/RIGHT]

Standard setting.

The left eye image is displayed on the left, next to the right eye image displayed on the right.

Both the left eye image and right eye image display the left eye input signal.

Both the left eye image and right eye image display the right eye input signal.

The left eye input signal is displayed in the left eye image and a completely black image is displayed in the right eye image.

A completely black image is displayed in the left eye image and the right input signal is displayed in the right eye image.

Note f The [3D TEST MODE] settings return to [NORMAL] when the projector is switched off.

f This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to other than [SINGLE].

f This is disabled when [3D TEST PATTERN] is displayed.

94 - ENGLISH


[3D TEST PATTERN]

The 3D test pattern can be used to check operation and make adjustments even without a 3D signal.

1) Press as to select [3D TEST PATTERN].


Menu screen + Entry screen

Menu screen + Left: white/

Right: black

Menu screen + Left: black/

Right: white

Select a test pattern so that it is easy to check operations and make adjustments.

Note f The 3D test pattern cannot be displayed when the following inputs are selected.

g VIDEO input g RGB1 input (only when [RGB IN] is set to [Y/C]) f This is disabled when [3D SYSTEM SETTING] is set to other than [SINGLE].

[SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE]

Set to show or hide the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on.

1) Press as to select [SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MESSAGE].


[ON]

[OFF]

Shows the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on.

Hides the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on.

Note f Set to [OFF] to hide the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing when the projector is switched on.

f A confirmation screen is displayed when switched from [ON] to [OFF]. Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button to change the setting to [OFF].

Attention f When 3D images are viewed by unspecified number of people for commercial use, display the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing to notify viewers.

[3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS]

Show the safety precautions message related to 3D viewing.

1) Press as to select [3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS].


f The [3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS] screen is displayed.

f Press qw to switch the page.

3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

If you view 3D images, please note below.

In addition, when 3D images will be viewed by unspecified number of people or used for commercial applications, someone in authority should convey the following precautions.

To enjoy 3D images safely and comfortably, please refer to the Operating Instructions for in-depth description.

1/2 3D SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

Please refrain from viewing 3D images if you do not feel well or are experiencing visual fatigue.

Please use the contents which has been properly made for 3D.

View from at least the recommended distance.

(3 times the effective height of the screen)

2/2

Refer to the Operating Instructions if this message is no longer needed.

MENU

CHANGE

EXIT

MENU

CHANGE

EXIT

ENGLISH - 95

Chapter 4 Settings — [DISPLAY OPTION] menu

[DISPLAY OPTION] menu

On the menu screen, select [DISPLAY OPTION] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.


[COLOR MATCHING]

Correct the color difference between projectors when using multiple projectors simultaneously.

Adjusting the color matching as desired

1) Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].


[OFF]

[3COLORS]

[7COLORS]

[709MODE]

[MEASURED]

Color matching adjustment is not carried out.

Adjusts the three colors [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

Adjusts the seven colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE].

Refer to “Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter” (x page 97) for details about this mode.

3) Select [3COLORS] or [7COLORS], and press the <ENTER> button.

f The [3COLORS] or [7COLORS] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE] ([RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN], [MAGENTA],

[YELLOW], or [WHITE] for [7COLORS]).


f The [3COLORS:RED], [3COLORS:GREEN], or [3COLORS:BLUE] screen is displayed.

For [7COLORS], the [7COLORS:RED], [7COLORS:GREEN], [7COLORS:BLUE], [7COLORS:CYAN], [7COLORS:MAGENTA],

[7COLORS:YELLOW], or [7COLORS:WHITE] screen is displayed.

f Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display a test pattern of selected colors.


7) Press qw to adjust. f The adjustment value changes between 0 and 2 048.

Note f Operation when correcting the adjustment color

When the correction color same as the adjustment color is changed: The luminance of the adjustment color changes.

When correction color red is changed: Red is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.

When correction color green is changed: Green is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.

When correction color blue is changed: Blue is added to or subtracted from the adjustment color.

f This adjustment should be carried out by a person who is familiar with the projector or by a service person because a high level of skill is required to make a successful adjustment.

f Pressing the <DEFAULT> button will restore the factory default settings for all items.

f When [COLOR MATCHING] is set to other than [OFF], [COLOR TEMPERATURE] is fixed to [USER1].

f Set [3D COLOR MATCHING] (x page 93) to set whether 2D and 3D signals are set separately or whether common data is used. (Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU) f When 2D and 3D settings are set separately, [NATIVE] or [3D] is displayed in the upper right of the menu. (Only for PT-DZ13KU,

PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU)

96 - ENGLISH


Adjusting the color matching using a colorimeter

Use a colorimeter that can measure chromaticity coordinates and luminance to change the colors [RED], [GREEN], [BLUE], [CYAN],

[MAGENTA], [YELLOW], or [WHITE] to desired colors.

1) Press as to select [COLOR MATCHING].

2) Press qw to select [709MODE] or [MEASURED].


f The [709MODE] or [MEASURED MODE] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [MEASURED DATA].


f The [MEASURED DATA] screen is displayed.

6) Measure the current luminance (Y) and the chromaticity coordinates (x, y) using the colorimeter.

7) Press as to select a color, and press qw to adjust the setting. f Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display a test pattern of selected colors.

8) Once all the input is completed, press the <MENU> button.

f The [709MODE] or [MEASURED MODE] screen is displayed.

f When [MEASURED] is selected in Step 2), proceed to Step 9) and enter the coordinates of desired colors.

9) Press as to select [TARGET DATA].


f The [TARGET DATA] screen is displayed.

11) Press as to select a color and press qw to input coordinates for desired colors. f Set [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to display a test pattern of selected colors.

12) Once all the input is completed, press the <MENU> button.

Note f When [709MODE] is selected in [COLOR MATCHING], the ITU-R BT.709 standard three primary colors are set as target data.

f Colors are not displayed properly when target data is a color outside the region of this projector.

f The [709MODE] may differ slightly from the ITU-R BT.709 standard colors.

f Set the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] to [ON] to automatically display a test pattern for use in adjusting the selected adjustment colors.

f Before using a colorimeter or similar instrument to measure measurement data, set [PICTURE MODE] to [DYNAMIC].

f A difference in the color coordinates of target data and measurement values obtained from an instrument may occur for certain instruments and measurement environments used.

f [AUTO TESTPATTERN] settings change together with the [AUTO TESTPATTERN] of [EDGE BLENDING].

[LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION]

Corrects the phenomenon in which colors that appear lighter when viewed on a large screen viewed from a close distance compared to when viewed on an average screen size so that colors appear the same.

1) Press as to select [LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION].


[OFF]

[1]

[2]

Performs no correction.

Performs weak correction.

Performs strong correction.

[SCREEN SETTING]


Set the screen size.

When changing the aspect of a projected image, correct to the optimum image position for the set screen. Set as necessary for the screen in use.

1) Press as to select [SCREEN SETTING].


f The [SCREEN SETTING] screen is displayed.

ENGLISH - 97

3) Press qw to switch the [SCREEN FORMAT] item. f The items will switch each time you press the button.

Model No.

PT-DZ13KU, PT-DZ10KU

PT-DS12KU


[SCREEN FORMAT]

[16:10]

[4:3]

[16:9]

[4:3]

[16:9]

Range when [SCREEN POSITION] is selected

Cannot be adjusted.

Adjusts the horizontal position between -160 and 160.

Adjusts the vertical position between -60 and 60.

Cannot be adjusted.

Adjusts the vertical position between -132 and 131.

4) Press as to select [SCREEN POSITION]. f If [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [16:10] in PT-DZ13KU and PT-DZ10KU, or [SCREEN FORMAT] is set to [4:3] in PT-DS12KU, then selection and adjustment of [SCREEN POSITION] are not available.

5) Press qw to adjust [SCREEN POSITION].

[AUTO SIGNAL]

Set whether to execute automatic setup of signals automatically.

The screen display position or signal level can be adjusted automatically without pressing the <AUTO SETUP> button on the remote control on each occasion if you input unregistered signals frequently at meetings, etc.

1) Press as to select [AUTO SIGNAL].


[OFF]

[ON]

Sets the auto signal function to off.

Executes automatic setup automatically when images are changed to unregistered signals during projection.

[AUTO SETUP]

Set this when adjusting a special signal or horizontally long (such as 16:9) signal.

Setting with [MODE]

1) Press as to select [AUTO SETUP].


f The [AUTO SETUP] screen is displayed.



[DEFAULT]

[WIDE]

[USER]

Standard setting.

Select when an image aspect is a wide-screen signal, which does not meet the [DEFAULT] settings.

Select when receiving a signal with a special horizontal resolution (number of display dots).

f When [DEFAULT] or [WIDE] is selected, proceed to Step 7).

f When [USER] is selected, proceed to Step 5).

5) Press as to select [DISPLAY DOTS], and press qw to adjust [DISPLAY DOTS] to the horizontal resolution of the signal source.



f Automatic adjustment is executed. [PROGRESS] is displayed while automatically adjusting. When complete, the system returns to the

[AUTO SETUP] screen.

Adjusting position automatically


98 - ENGLISH




3) Press as to select [POSITION ADJUST].


[OFF]

[ON]

Does not perform automatic adjustment.

Adjust the screen position and size when automatic setup is executed.

Adjusting signal level automatically




3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST].


[OFF]

[ON]

Does not perform automatic adjustment.

Adjusts black level (on-screen menu [BRIGHTNESS]) and white level (on-screen menu

[CONTRAST]) when automatic setup is executed.

Note f [SIGNAL LEVEL ADJUST] may not function properly unless a still image containing clear blacks and whites is input.

[RGB IN]

Set to match the signal to input to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal.

Setting [RGB1 INPUT SETTING]

1) Press as to select [RGB IN].


f The [RGB IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [RGB1 INPUT SETTING].


[RGB/YP

B

P

R

]

[Y/C]

Select when inputting an RGB signal or YC

B

C

R

/YP

B

P

R

signals to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal.

Select when inputting a luminance signal and color signal to the <RGB 1 IN> terminal.

Switching the slice level of an input sync signal

1) Press as to select [RGB IN].


f The [RGB IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [RGB1 SYNC SLICE LEVEL] or [RGB2 SYNC SLICE LEVEL].


[LOW]

[HIGH]

Sets the slice level to [LOW].

Sets the slice level to [HIGH].

ENGLISH - 99


[DVI-D IN]

Switch the setting when the external device is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal of the projector and the image is not projected correctly.

1) Press as to select [DVI-D IN].


f The [DVI-D IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [EDID].


[EDID3]

[EDID1]

[EDID2:PC]

Recognizes movie-based video signals and still image signals automatically.

Select mainly when an external device that outputs movie-based video signals (such as a blu-ray disc player) is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.

Select mainly when an external device that outputs still image signals (such as a computer) is connected to the <DVI-D IN> terminal.

5) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].


[AUTO]

[0-255:PC]

[16-235]

Automatically sets the signal level.

Select when an external device (such as a computer) is connected via the DVI-D terminal output.

Select when an external device (such as a blu-ray disc player) is connected via the HDMI terminal output using a conversion cable, etc.

Note f The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the external device regarding the output of the external device.

f The data for Plug and play will change when the setting is changed. Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 175) for a resolution that supports plug and play.

[HDMI IN]

Switch the setting when the external device is connected to the <HDMI IN> terminal of the projector and the image is not projected correctly.

1) Press as to select [HDMI IN].


f The [HDMI IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the [SIGNAL LEVEL] item. f The items will switch each time you press the button.

[AUTO]

[64-940]

[0-1023]

Automatically sets the signal level.

Select when the HDMI terminal of an external device (such as a blu-ray disc player) is connected to the <HDMI IN> terminal.

Select when the DVI-D terminal output of an external device (such as a computer) is connected to the

<HDMI IN> terminal via a conversion cable or similar cable.

Select also when the HDMI terminal output of a computer or other device is connected to the <HDMI

IN> terminal.

Note f The optimal setting varies depending on the output setting of the connected external device. Refer to the operating instructions of the external device regarding the output of the external device.

f The HDMI signal level is displayed for every 30 bits of input.

[SDI IN]


Set to match the signal to input to the <SDI IN 1>/<SDI IN 2> terminals (PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU) or <SDI IN> terminal (PT-DZ10KU).

100 - ENGLISH


Setting [SDI LINK]


1) Press as to select [SDI IN].


f The [SDI IN] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [SDI LINK].


[SINGLE LINK]

[DUAL LINK]

Sets SDI1 input and SDI2 input to single link.

Sets SDI1 input and SDI2 input to dual link.

Setting [SIGNAL LEVEL]

Select the amplitude of the signal to input.




3) Press as to select [SIGNAL LEVEL].


[64-940]

[4-1019]

Normally use this setting.

Select when gray is displayed as black.

Setting [BIT DEPTH]




3) Press as to select [BIT DEPTH].


[AUTO]

[12-bit]

[10-bit]

Automatically select 12 bits or 10 bits.

Fix to 12 bits.

Fix to 10 bits.

Setting [3G-SDI MAPPING]




3) Press as to select [3G-SDI MAPPING].


[AUTO]

[LEVEL A]

[LEVEL B]

Automatically select level A or level B.

Fix to level A.

Fix to level B.

Note f Does not operate during SD-SDI or HD-SDI input.

ENGLISH - 101


[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]

Set the on-screen display.

Setting [OSD POSITION]

Set the position of the menu screen (OSD).

1) Press as to select [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY].


f The [ON-SCREEN DISPLAY] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [OSD POSITION].


[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

Sets to the center left of the screen.

Sets to the bottom left of the screen.

Sets to the top center of the screen.

Sets to the center of the screen.

Sets to the bottom center of the screen.

Sets to the upper right of the screen.

Sets to the center right of the screen.

Sets to the bottom right of the screen.

Sets to the upper left of the screen.

Setting [OSD DESIGN]

Set the color of the menu screen (OSD).




3) Press as to select [OSD DESIGN].


[4]

[5]

[6]

[1]

[2]

[3]

Sets to yellow.

Sets to blue.

Sets to white.

Sets to green.

Sets to peach.

Sets to brown.

Setting [OSD MEMORY]

Set hold for the position of the menu screen (OSD) cursor.




3) Press as to select [OSD MEMORY].


[ON]

[OFF]

Holds the cursor position.

Does not hold the cursor position.

102 - ENGLISH


Note f Even if [OSD MEMORY] is set to [ON], the cursor position will not be held when the <MAIN POWER> switch of the projector body is turned

<OFF>.

Setting [INPUT GUIDE]

Set whether to display the input guide (input terminal name, signal name, and memory number currently selected) in the position set in the

[OSD POSITION].




3) Press as to select [INPUT GUIDE].


[ON]

[OFF]

Displays the input guide.

Hides the input guide.

Setting [WARNING MESSAGE]

Set the display/hide of the warning message.




3) Press as to select [WARNING MESSAGE].


[ON]

[OFF]

Displays the warning message.

Hides the warning message.

[BACK COLOR]

Set the display of the projected screen when there is no signal input.

1) Press as to select [BACK COLOR].


[BLUE]

[BLACK]

[DEFAULT LOGO]

[USER LOGO]

Displays the entire projection area in blue.

Displays the entire projection area in black.

Displays the Panasonic logo.

Displays the image registered by the user.

Note f To create/register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.

ENGLISH - 103


[STARTUP LOGO]

Set the logo display when the power is turned on.

1) Press as to select [STARTUP LOGO].


[DEFAULT LOGO]

[USER LOGO]

[NONE]

Displays the Panasonic logo.


Disables the startup logo display.

Note f The startup logo will disappear in approximately 15 seconds.

f To create/register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.

[UNIFORMITY]

Correct the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen.

Setting each color

1) Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].


f The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [WHITE], [RED], [GREEN], or [BLUE].

4) Press qw to switch.

Parameter

[VERTICAL]

[HORIZONTAL]

Operation

Press the w button.

Press the q button.

Press the w button.

Press the q button.

Adjustment

Deepens upper colors.

Deepens lower colors.

Deepens colors on the left.

Deepens colors on the right.


-127 - 127

Setting [PC CORRECTION]

To use the [PC CORRECTION] function, the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is required. To purchase the product, consult your dealer.

1) Press as to select [UNIFORMITY].


f The [UNIFORMITY] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [PC CORRECTION].


[OFF]

[ON] *1

Does not use a computer to correct.

Use a computer to correct the brightness and color unevenness of the entire screen.

*1 Advanced skills are necessary to use computer controls to correct. Consult your dealer.

Note f [UNIFORMITY] can be set for each [LAMP SELECT] setting.

f The [UNIFORMITY] settings are not reset to the factory default when [INITIALIZE] is executed.

104 - ENGLISH


[SHUTTER SETTING]

Set image fade-in and fade-out at opening and closing of the shutter. Set automatic opening and closing of the shutter when power is turned on.

Setting [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT]

1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].


f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [FADE-IN] or [FADE-OUT].


Item

[OFF]

[FADE-IN]

[FADE-OUT] [0.5 s] - [10.0 s]

Adjustment

Does not set fade-in or fade-out.

Allows you to set the fade-in or fade-out time.

Select an item from [0.5 s] to [4.0 s], [5.0 s], [7.0 s], and [10.0 s].

[0.5 s] - [4.0 s] can be selected in increments of 0.5.

Note f Press the <SHUTTER> button on the remote control or the control panel during fade-in or fade-out to cancel the fade operation.

Setting [STARTUP]

1) Press as to select [SHUTTER SETTING].


f The [SHUTTER SETTING] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [STARTUP].


[OPEN]

[CLOSE]

Projection begins with the shutter open when the power is turned on.

Projection begins with the shutter close when the power is turned on.

[FREEZE]

Pause the projected image temporarily regardless of the playback of the external device.

1) Press as to select [FREEZE].


f Press the <MENU> button to release.

Note f [FREEZE] is displayed on the screen when video is paused.

[WAVEFORM MONITOR]

Use the input signals from a connected external device to display in a waveform. Check whether video output (luminance) signal level is within the recommended range for the projector and adjust.

1) Press as to select [WAVEFORM MONITOR].


[OFF]

[ON]

Does not display the waveform monitor.

Displays the waveform monitor.

3) Press the <MENU> button two times to clear.

4) Press as to select any horizontal line.

ENGLISH - 105


5) Press the <ENTER> button to switch the Select line to either luminance, red, green, or blue.

f Line selection items switch each time the <ENTER> is pressed only when the waveform monitor is displayed.

“Select line (luminance)” Displayed in white waveform.

“Select line (red)” Displayed in red waveform.

“Select line (green)”

“Select line (blue)”

Displayed in green waveform.

Displayed in blue waveform.

Note f Setting is also available from [FUNCTION BUTTON] (x page 121).

f Waveform monitor cannot be displayed in [P IN P].

f f The waveform monitor is not displayed when on-screen display is hidden (off).

f

The waveform monitor turns off when [P IN P] is executed during waveform monitoring.

To display the waveform monitor in 3D images, use [3D WAVEFORM MONITOR]. (Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU)

Adjusting the waveform

Project the luminance adjustment signal of a commercial test disk (0 % (0 IRE or 7.5 IRE) – 100 % (100 IRE)) and adjust.

Image displayable area

Screen position

1) Select “Select line (luminance)” on the waveform monitor.

2) Adjust black level.

f Use [BRIGHTNESS] in the on-screen menu [PICTURE] to adjust the black level 0 % of the video signal to the 0 % position of the waveform monitor.

3) Adjust white level.

f Use [CONTRAST] in the on-screen menu [PICTURE] to adjust the white level 100 % of the video signal to the 100 % position of the waveform monitor.

Adjusting red, green, and blue

1) Set [COLOR TEMPERATURE] to [USER1] or [USER2] (x page 72).

2) Select “Select line (red)” on the waveform monitor.

3) Adjust dark red areas.

f Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE LOW] to adjust the black level 0 % of the video signal to the 0 % position of the waveform monitor.

4) Adjust bright red areas.

f Use [RED] in [WHITE BALANCE HIGH] to adjust the white level 100 % of the video signal to the 100 % position of the waveform monitor.

5) Use the procedure for [RED] to adjust [GREEN] and [BLUE].

Note f Before adjusting the black level for DVI-D signals, HDMI signals, and SDI signals, confirm that the [SIGNAL LEVEL] setting is correct.

106 - ENGLISH


[CUT OFF]

Each red, green, and blue color component can be removed.

1) Press as to select [CUT OFF].


f The [CUT OFF] screen is displayed.



[OFF]

[ON]

Disables cutoff.

Enables cutoff.

Note f When input is switched or a signal is switched, the cutoff setting returns to its original setting (off).

ENGLISH - 107

Chapter 4 Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

[PROJECTOR SETUP] menu

On the menu screen, select [PROJECTOR SETUP] from the main menu, and select an item from the sub-menu.


[PROJECTOR ID]

The projector has an ID number setting function that can be used when multiple projectors are used side by side to enable simultaneous control or individual control via a single remote control.

1) Press as to select [PROJECTOR ID].


[ALL]

[1] - [64]

Select when controlling projectors without specifying an ID number.

Select when specifying an ID number to control individual projector.

Note f To specify an ID number for individual control, the ID number of a remote control must match the ID number of the projector.

f When the ID number is set to [ALL], the projector will operate regardless of the ID number specified during remote control or computer control.

If multiple projectors are set up side by side with IDs set to [ALL], they cannot be controlled separately from the projectors with other ID numbers.

f Refer to “Setting the remote control ID numbers” (x page 28) for how to set the ID number on the remote control.


Set the projection method in accordance with the installation status of the projector.

Change the projection method if the screen display is upside down or inverted.

1) Press as to select [PROJECTION METHOD].


f The [PROJECTION METHOD] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select the projection method.

[FRONT/FLOOR]

[FRONT/CEILING]

[REAR/FLOOR]

[REAR/CEILING]

When installing the projector on the desk, etc., in front of the screen

When installing the projector in front of the screen using the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors

(optional)

When installing the projector on the desk, etc., behind the screen (with a translucent screen)

When installing the projector behind the screen (with a translucent screen) using the Ceiling Mount

Bracket for Projectors (optional)


5) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button.

Attention f When the [PROJECTION METHOD] setting is changed, confirm that [COOLING CONDITION] (x page 109) is set correctly.

108 - ENGLISH



Change the fan control depending on the direction of projection.

Set [COOLING CONDITION] according to the projection direction, but set it to [AUTO] normally. Using the projector with incorrect setting may shorten the life of the lamp.

[VERTICAL UP SETTING]

[FLOOR SETTING]

30°

30°

30°

30°

[CEILING SETTING]

[VERTICAL DOWN SETTING]

： Projection direction

1) Press as to select [COOLING CONDITION].


f The [COOLING CONDITION] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select a cooling condition. f When [AUTO] is selected, the cooling conditions of [FLOOR SETTING], [CEILING SETTING], [VERTICAL UP SETTING], and

[VERTICAL DOWN SETTING] are set automatically.

You can check the setting from [COOLING CONDITION] on the [STATUS] screen.



Note f This item cannot be set when using the optional Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode) (Model No.: ET-LAD320P (1 pc), ET-LAD320PW

(2 pcs)). (Setting is fixed to [PORTRAIT SETTING].)

[HIGH ALTITUDE MODE]

Set to [ON] when using the projector at high altitudes between 1 400 m (4 593') or higher and lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level.

1) Press as to select [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE].


[OFF]

[ON]

When using at a location lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level

When using at high altitudes (1 400 m (4 593') or higher and lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level)


Note f The speed of the fan increases and the operation sound becomes louder when set to [ON].

f This item cannot be set when using the optional Smoke cut filter (Model No.: ET-SFD320). (Setting is fixed to [OFF].) Use it at elevations lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level.

[LAMP SELECT]

Select the lamp to be turned on from the two built-in luminous lamps according to the use conditions or purposes.

1) Press as to select [LAMP SELECT].


[DUAL]

[SINGLE]

[LAMP1]

[LAMP2]

Two lamps will light.

One lamp will light. (The lamp with shorter runtime will automatically light.)

Lamp 1 will light.

Lamp 2 will light.

ENGLISH - 109



Note f For a certain time after [LAMP SELECT] is switched, [LAMP SELECT] cannot be switched again, because the speed of the lamp replacement cycle will increase. Repeatedly switching [LAMP SELECT] in a short time will also increase the speed of the lamp replacement cycle.

f The colors of the items indicate the status.

Green

Yellow

Red

White

Current setting

Current setting (when there is a lamp that cannot turn on or failed to turn on)

Lamp that has failed to turn on

Any other status f When a lamp cannot turn on or the runtime exceeds 2 500 hours *1*2 , the lamp is turned off and the other lamp is turned on. The projector enters standby mode when the runtime of both lamps exceeds 2 500 hours *1*2 .

*1 500 hours when using the optional Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode) (Model No.: ET-LAD320P (1 pc), ET-LAD320PW (2 pcs)).

*2 3 500 hours for PT-DZ10KU.

f Ensure that lamp units not to be turned on are also installed.

f More lamps than the specified number of lamps light temporarily to prevent decreased illuminance when a lamp is switched.

[LAMP RELAY]

Switch the lamp to be turned on automatically by specifying the day of the week and time.

The degradation of the lamp due to continuous usage can be reduced by automatically switching the lamp to be turned on when using the projector continuously for a week or more.

1) Press as to select [LAMP RELAY].


[OFF]

[24H]

[1WEEK]

Disables lamp relay.

Switches the lamp daily.

Switches the lamp weekly.

f When [24H] or [1WEEK] is selected, proceed to Step 3).

3) Press as to select [TIME].


f Enters adjustment mode (the display is blinking).

5) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a time.

f Selecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59.


f The adjusted time is established.

f When [1WEEK] is selected in Step 2), proceed to Step 7).

7) Press as to select [DAY OF THE WEEK].


[SUNDAY]

[MONDAY]

[TUESDAY]

[WEDNESDAY]

[THURSDAY]

[FRIDAY]

[SATURDAY]

Switches the lamp automatically on the set day of the week.

Note f The [LAMP RELAY] function is enabled when [SINGLE] or [DUAL] is selected in [LAMP SELECT].

f When [DUAL] is selected in [LAMP SELECT], only one lamp will light for four hours from the specified time. f The operating time will be the local time. (x page 121)

110 - ENGLISH


[LAMP POWER]

Switch the brightness of the lamp according to the operating environment of the projector or the purpose.

1) Press as to select [LAMP POWER].


[HIGH] *1

[MIDDLE] *1

[NORMAL] *2

[ECO]

Select when high luminance is required.

Select when using the projector with slightly reduced luminance compared to [HIGH].

Select when high luminance is required.

Select when high luminance is not required.


*2 Only for PT-DZ10KU

Note f You can reduce power consumption and operation noise, and extend the life of the lamps by setting to [MIDDLE] rather than [HIGH], or by setting to [ECO] rather than [MIDDLE] or [NORMAL].

[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL]

The projector is equipped with a luminance sensor to measure brightness and functions to correct screen brightness resulting from changes in lamp brightness.

Use the projector when using multiple projectors to display on multiple screens to reduce changes in overall brightness of the multiple screens due to lamp degradation and suppress variation in brightness to preserve uniformity.

Setting [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN]

Adjust the brightness when displaying multiple screens using multiple projectors.

1) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL].


f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN].


Operation

Press the w button.

Press the q button.

Brightness

Adjustment

Maximum amount of brightness correction

The screen becomes brighter.

The maximum amount of correction is reduced.

The screen becomes darker.

The maximum amount of correction is increased.


20 % - 100 %

Note f When using only one projector, the value obtained by subtracting the value of the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] from 100 % is the maximum amount of brightness correction. Brightness cannot be corrected through brightness control since the maximum amount of correction becomes 0 % when [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] is at 100 %.

f Luminance will be unsteady for eight minutes after a lamp is turned on. Make adjustments at least 8 minutes after starting projection.

f The result of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] adjustments is reflected on all image signals, internal test patterns, and on-screen menus.

f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] setting is enabled even if [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is [OFF].

Setting [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP]

Set brightness control operation.




3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP].


f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] screen is displayed.

ENGLISH - 111




[OFF]

[AUTO]

[PC]

Does not correct the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.

Corrects the brightness of the screen by the brightness sensor.

Automatically corrects screen brightness when lamp brightness changes.

Synchronizes nine or more projectors through a computer using the dedicated software “Multi

Projector Monitoring & Control Software” *1 .

*1 “Multi Projector Monitoring & Control Software” is included in the supplied CD-ROM.

f When [AUTO] is selected, proceed to Step 7).

7) Press as to select [LINK].


[OFF]

[GROUP A]

[GROUP B]

[GROUP C]

[GROUP D]

Performs corrections by the brightness sensor in one projector without synchronizing with the other projectors.

The period, in which the constant brightness kept by the small value of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL

GAIN], is prolonged.

Synchronizes corrections in multiple projectors by the brightness sensor.

You can set up to four groups (A to D) within the same subnet by using the network function.

You can also register and synchronize up to eight projectors in one group.

9) Press as to select [CALIBRATION TIME].


f Enters adjustment mode (the display is blinking).

11) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a time.

f Selecting “hour” allows setting of only the hour in increments of one hour, and selecting “minute” allows setting of only the minute in increments of one minute between 00 and 59.

f If you do not specify the time, select [OFF] between 23 and 00 o’clock or between 59 and 00 minutes.


f [CALIBRATION TIME] is set.

f Brightness is measured at the specified time. Dynamic iris is fixed to open during measurement.

13) Press as to select [CALIBRATION MESSAGE].


[ON]

[OFF]

Messages are displayed during calibration.

Messages are not displayed during calibration.

15) Press as to select [APPLY].


f The set [MODE] and [LINK] are enabled, and LAMP RELAY screen alert is displayed when the [LAMP RELAY] setting is [OFF]. When

[CALIBRATION MESSAGE] is set to [ON], a calibration running message is displayed which will automatically disappear 30 seconds after calibration completes.

f If the <ENTER> button is pressed with [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] set to other than [OFF], the brightness of the lamp at the time the button was pressed is recorded as the standard brightness.

f If the <ENTER> button is pressed when [LINK] is set from [GROUP A] to [GROUP D], the group name is displayed on the screens of projectors that have been set in the same group.

LINK GROUP A

112 - ENGLISH


Note f When [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], keep the shutter open for at least two minutes to perform the brightness sensor calibration after completed the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] setting.

f If the shutter is closed within approx. 10 minutes after the lamp has turned on while [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to

[AUTO] or [PC], brightness cannot be measured. Therefore, brightness may be corrected approx. two minutes after the shutter opens.

f When [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] or [PC], the lamp brightness is automatically measured eight minutes after the lamp is turned on, and correction is performed so that the screen brightness will be the same as the standard brightness when the brightness control is adjusted. Lamp brightness cannot be measured during the eight minutes after it is turned on because it is not steady.

f If a lamp turns off or lamp relay is performed while [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] and [LAMP SELECT] is set to [DUAL], brightness is corrected to the extent possible one minute later.

f When [MODE] in [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to [AUTO] and [LINK] is set to [OFF], brightness will be corrected until it reaches the maximum amount of correction.

f The variation in brightness may increase due to dust accumulating on the lens, screen, or inside the projector, depending on the installation environment of the projector.

f Adjust brightness control again when lamp degradation causes increased variation in brightness or a lamp is replaced.

f For continued use longer than 24 hours, set the [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [CALIBRATION TIME], or set [LAMP RELAY]

(x page 110). If it is not set, correction will not be performed automatically.

f Brightness control and iris operate simultaneously, but the iris is fully open and does not operate while a brightness measurement is performed.

f The [CALIBRATION TIME] setting will be reflected at the time when you enter the time.

f The [CALIBRATION MESSAGE] setting will be reflected at the time when items are switched using qw.

Displaying [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS]

Display the brightness control status.




3) Press as to select [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS].


f The [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] screen is displayed.

[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS] screen display example

When [MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] is set to

[OFF]

The screen shows the status that the brightness control is disabled.

BRIGHTNESS CONTROL STATUS

MODE

PROJECTOR

OFF

1

MENU

RETURN


[AUTO] and [LINK] is set to [OFF]

The screen shows the status of the brightness control in one projector


LINK

PROJECTOR

OFF 5

1

6

MENU

RETURN

ENGLISH - 113



[AUTO] and [LINK] is set from [GROUP A] to [GROUP D]

The screen shows the status of the brightness control of synchronized projectors (up to eight units), including the projector being controlled through the on-screen menu.


LINK

1:

2:

3:

4:

5:

6:

7:

UPDATE

PROJECTOR

PROJECTOR2

PROJECTOR3

GROUP A

192. 168. 30. 2

192. 168. 30. 3

192. 168. 30. 4

1

2

3

4

5

7


[PC]


MODE

PROJECTOR

PC 5

1

6

MENU

RETURN

MENU SELECT

8

1 Display the name of the projector.

2 Display the synchronized group.

3 Display the IP address of the projector.

4 Display the names and IP addresses of projectors in same group detected over the network.

5 Display the status by color.

Green: There is an allowance for brightness correction.

Yellow: There is little allowance for brightness correction.

Red: There is a brightness control error.

6 Display error detailed messages.

7 Display error messages.

When the message [Failed to apply BRIGHTNESS CONTROL to some projectors.] appears, it means that synchronization with the projector displayed in red has failed.

Press as to select the projector displayed in red, and press the <ENTER> button to display the error details.

8 Update to the latest status information.

r

Error details

Error message

[Exceed maximum number of projectors.]

[Please check the COMMAND

CONTROL setting.]

[Please check the USER NAME and PASSWORD in the COMMAND

CONTROL setting.]

[Cannot apply BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL. Please check projector status.]

[Brightness Sensor Error]

Measures to take f Limit the number of projectors in one group to eight.

f When synchronizing nine or more projectors, use the dedicated software “Multi Projector

Monitoring & Control Software” *1 through a computer.

f Set [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND CONTROL] to [ON] for the projector in error.

f Set [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT] of all projectors to be linked to the same value.

f Assign the same [User name] and [Password] strings that have web control administrator rights to all projectors to be linked.

f The projector is in standby. Switch on the power.

f There is a problem with the brightness sensor. If problems persist even after switching on the power, consult your dealer.

*1 “Multi Projector Monitoring & Control Software” is included in the supplied CD-ROM.

Note f If the synchronized projectors are not displayed in the list, check the following: g Are there devices with the same IP address on the network?

g Are the LAN cables connected correctly? (x page 136) g Are the subnets of the projectors the same?

g Are the same [LINK] settings applied to a group?

f Refer to [NETWORK SETUP] (x page 135) or “[Network config] page” (x page 143) on how to change the projector name.

114 - ENGLISH


Brightness control adjustment procedure example

The steps exemplify an adjustment to link the brightness of eight projectors connected in a network.

1) Connect all projectors to the hub using LAN cables. (x page 136)

2) Switch on all projectors and start projection.

3) Set [LAMP SELECT] to either [DUAL] or [SINGLE] for all projectors.

4) Set [MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [OFF], and select [APPLY], and then press the

<ENTER> button.

5) Set [SUBNET MASK] and [IP ADDRESS] in each projector.

f To be able to communicate over the network, set the same value in [SUBNET MASK] for all projectors and set a different value in [IP

ADDRESS] for each projector.

6) Wait for at least eight minutes after starting projection until the lamp brightness becomes steady.

7) Set all items in the [PICTURE] menu of all projectors to the same values.

8) Adjust [COLOR MATCHING] to match colors.

9) Display the internal test pattern “All white” in all projectors.

10) Set [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] to 100 % in all projectors.

11) Set [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] to 90 % in the projector with the least brightness.

12) Adjust [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] in each projector.

f Adjust [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] of all the other projectors so that the brightness is matched to the projector of which

[BRIGHTNESS CONTROL GAIN] is set to 90 %.

13) Set [MODE] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] to [AUTO], and [LINK] to [GROUP A] in all projectors.

14) Select [APPLY] of [BRIGHTNESS CONTROL SETUP] and press the <ENTER> button in all projectors.

f Brightness control starts.

Note f Brightness is automatically corrected each time the lamp blinks when the power is switched on or off.

f Adjust brightness control again when variation in brightness has increased or a lamp is replaced.

[STANDBY MODE]

Set the power consumption during the standby.

1) Press as to select [STANDBY MODE].


[NORMAL]

[ECO]

Use this setting to use the network function during standby.

Use this setting to reduce power consumption during standby.

Note f When set to [ECO], network functions, <SERIAL OUT> terminal, and some RS-232C commands are not available during standby.

f When set to [ECO], it may take approx. 10 seconds longer before the projector starts projecting after the power is turned on, compared with when [NORMAL] is set.

ENGLISH - 115


[SCHEDULE]

Set the command execution schedule for each day of the week.

Enabling/disabling the schedule function

1) Press as to select [SCHEDULE].


[OFF]

[ON]

Disables the schedule function.

Enables the schedule function. Refer to “How to assign a program” (x page 116) or “How to set a program” (x page 116) for how to set the schedule.

Note f When [SCHEDULE] is set to [ON], the [STANDBY MODE] setting is forcibly switched to [NORMAL], and the setting cannot be changed.

Even if [SCHEDULE] is then set to [OFF] when in this state, the setting of [STANDBY MODE] remains at [NORMAL].

How to assign a program


2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button. f The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.

3) Select and assign program to each day of week.

f Press as to select the day of week, and press qw to select a program number.

f You can set the program from No.1 to No.7. “- - -” indicates that the program number has not been set.

How to set a program

Set up to 16 commands to each program.


2) Press qw to select [ON], and press the <ENTER> button. f The [SCHEDULE] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [PROGRAM EDIT].

4) Press qw to select a program number, and press the <ENTER> button.

5) Press as to select a command number, and press the <ENTER> button. f You can change the page using qw.

6) Press asqw to select [TIME], and press the <ENTER> button.

7) Press qw to select “hour” or “minute”, and press as or the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set a time, and then press the <ENTER> button.

8) Press asqw to select [COMMAND].


f For the detailed settings of [COMMAND], the details set in Step 11) are displayed.

[COMMAND]

[POWER ON]

[STANDBY]

[SHUTTER]

Detailed settings of

[COMMAND]

―

―

[OPEN]

[CLOSE]

Switches on the projector.

Enters standby.

Opens the shutter.

Closes the shutter.

Description

116 - ENGLISH


[COMMAND]

[INPUT]

Detailed settings of

[COMMAND]

[VIDEO]

[RGB1]

[RGB2]

[DVI-D]

[HDMI]

[SDI1] *1

[LAMP SELECT]

[SDI2] *2

[DUAL]

[SINGLE]

[HIGH] *3

[LAMP POWER]

[P IN P]

[MIDDLE] *3

[NORMAL] *4

[ECO]

[OFF]

[USER1]

[USER2]

[USER3]


*2 Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU



Description

Switches the input to VIDEO.




Switches the input to HDMI.

(PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

Switches the input to SDI1.

(PT-DZ10KU)


Switches the input to SDI2.

Turns on two lamps.

Turns on one lamp. (The lamp with shorter runtime will automatically light.)

Sets the lamp brightness to high luminance.

Sets the lamp brightness to slightly lower luminance compared to

[HIGH].

Sets the lamp brightness to high luminance.

Sets the lamp brightness to low luminance.

P IN P function is not used.

Lays out the sub-screen with the settings of [USER1].




f The [COMMAND] detailed screen is displayed.

11) Press as to select a [COMMAND]. f For [COMMAND] which requires detailed settings, the items of the detailed settings will switch each time you press qw.


f The command is fixed and n is displayed at the left of the selected command.

f After the command is fixed, press the <MENU> button to close the detailed setting screen.

13) Press asqw to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f If you attempt to register the setting that would make the lamp turn on for a short time, an error message will be displayed on the screen.

Set the time and command again.

f To delete a command already set, press the <DEFAULT> button on the Step 5) screen, or select [DELETE] on the Step 6) screen and press the <ENTER> button.

f If multiple commands have been set for the same time, they are executed in chronological order starting from the smallest command number.

f The operating time will be the local time. (x page 121) f If an operation is executed with the remote control or control panel of the projector or with a control command before the command set in

[SCHEDULE] is executed, the command set with this function may not be executed.

[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]

Set the input when the projector is switched on to start projection.

1) Press as to select [STARTUP INPUT SELECT].


[LAST USED]

[VIDEO]

[RGB1]

[RGB2]

[DVI-D]

Keeps the input selected last.

Sets the input to VIDEO.

Sets the input to RGB1.

Sets the input to RGB2.

Sets the input to DVI-D.

ENGLISH - 117


[HDMI]

[SDI1] *1 /[SDI] *2

[SDI2] *1



[RS-232C]

Sets the input to HDMI.

Sets the input to SDI/SDI1.

Sets the input to SDI2.

Set the communication conditions of the <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal.

Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL IN> terminal

1) Press as to select [RS-232C].


f The [RS-232C] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [(IN) BAUDRATE].


[9600]

[19200]

[38400]

Select the proper speed.

5) Press as to select [(IN) PARITY].


[NONE]

[EVEN]

[ODD]

Select the parity condition.

Setting the communication condition of the <SERIAL OUT> terminal




3) Press as to select [(OUT) BAUDRATE].


[9600]

[19200]

[38400]

Select the proper speed.

5) Press as to select [(OUT) PARITY].


[NONE]

[EVEN]

[ODD]

Select the parity condition.

Setting the response


118 - ENGLISH




3) Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID ALL)].


[ON]

[OFF]

Returns the response when the ID setting is ALL.

Does not return the response when the ID setting is ALL.

5) Press as to select [GROUP].


[A] - [Z]

Controls multiple projectors simultaneously by sending the ID of RS-232C. You can set groups from

[A] to [Z]. The projector responds when the ID of RS-232C matches the setting.

7) Press as to select [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)].


[ON]

[OFF]

Returns the response when the ID setting is GROUP.

Does not return the response when the ID setting is GROUP.

Note f Refer to “<SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal” (x page 169).

[STATUS]

Display the status of the projector.

1) Press as to select [STATUS].


f The [STATUS] screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to switch the pages. f The page will change each time you press the button.

[INPUT]

[SIGNAL NAME]

[SIGNAL FREQUENCY]

[PROJECTOR RUNTIME]

Displays the input terminal currently selected.

Displays the input signal name.

Displays the frequency of the input signal.

Displays the operation times of the projector.

[LAMP1] *1

[LAMP2] *1

Displays the runtime and status of Lamp 1.

Displays the runtime and status of Lamp 2.

[INTAKE AIR TEMP.]

[OPTICS MODULE TEMP.] Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector.

[AROUND LAMP TEMP.] Displays the status of the temperature around the lamps of the projector.

[PROJECTOR TYPE]

[SERIAL NUMBER]

Displays the status of the air intake temperature of the projector.

Displays the type of the projector.

Displays the serial number of the projector.

[LAMP UNIT MODEL NO.] Displays the model no. of the lamp unit.

[LAMP1 SERIAL NUMBER] Displays the serial number of the lamp 1.

[LAMP2 SERIAL NUMBER] Displays the serial number of the lamp 2.

[MAIN VERSION]

[SUB VERSION]

Displays the main version of the firmware of the projector.

Displays the sub version of the firmware of the projector.

[NETWORK VERSION]

[UPGRADE(ET-UK20)]

Displays the firmware version of the projector.

[ON COUNT]

Displays the activation status based on the Upgrade Kit.

[POWER ON TIMES] Displays the number of times the power is turned on.

[LAMP1 ON]

[LAMP2 ON]

Displays runtime in detail.

Displays the number of times the lamp is turned on.

[LAMP1]

[LAMP2]

[NUMBER OF REGISTERED

SIGNAL]

Displays runtime in detail.

Displays the number of registered signals.

ENGLISH - 119


[REMOTE2 STATUS]

[AC VOLTAGE]


[SIGNAL INFORMATION]

Displays the control status of the REMOTE2.

Displays the status of the AC voltage.

Displays the set cooling conditions. When [AUTO] is set, automatically recognized result is displayed.

[MEMORY NO.]

[INPUT]

[SIGNAL NAME]

[SIGNAL FREQUENCY]

[SYNC.STATE]

[V.SYNC WIDTH]

[SCAN TYPE]

[TOTAL DOTS]

[DISPLAY DOTS]

[TOTAL LINES]

[DISPLAY LINES]

[SAMPLING]

[SIGNAL LEVEL]

[BIT DEPTH]

Displays the memory number of the input signal.

Displays the input terminal currently selected.

Displays the input signal name.

Displays the frequency of the input signal.

Displays the synch polarity of the input signal.

Displays the vertical sync signal pulse width of the input signal.

Displays the scan type of the input signal.

Displays the total dot count of the input signal.

Displays the number of input signal display dots.

Displays the total line count of the input signal.

Displays the number of input signal display lines.

Displays the sampling information of the input signal.

Displays the signal level of the input signal.

Displays the gradation of the input signal.

*1 The lamp runtime to be displayed is real time. The following conversion is required to calculate the rough estimate for lamp replacement.

Model No.

PT-DZ13KU

PT-DS12KU

PT-DW11KU

PT-DZ10KU

Formula for lamp replacement time (rough estimate)

( A x 56 + B x 40 + C x 35) ÷ 56 f A: Runtime when [LAMP POWER] is set to [HIGH] f B: Runtime when [LAMP POWER] is set to [MIDDLE] f C: Runtime when [LAMP POWER] is set to [ECO]

The formula when the optional Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode) is used is:

A + B + C

( A x 40 + B x 35) ÷ 40 f A: Runtime when [LAMP POWER] is set to [NORMAL] f B: Runtime when [LAMP POWER] is set to [ECO]

The formula when the optional Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode) is used is:

A + B

Note f The content of status can be sent via E-mail by pressing the <ENTER> button while displaying the status.

f Some items in [SIGNAL INFORMATION] may be displayed and others not displayed, depending on the signal being input.

f If you attach a lamp unit used in a projector of a model different from the projector (PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU, PT-DZ10KU) to the projector, or when the lamp unit used in the projector to a projector of a different model, the “lighting time” and “runtime” displayed in

[STATUS] may differ from the actual time.

[NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF]

A function that automatically switches the power source of the projector to standby if there is no input signal for a certain period of time. The time before switching to standby can be set.

1) Press as to select [NO SIGNAL SHUT-OFF].


[DISABLE]

[10MIN.] - [90MIN.]

Disables the No signal shut-off function.

Allows you to set in ten minutes intervals.

[REMOTE2 MODE]

You can set the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.

1) Press as to select [REMOTE2 MODE].


[DEFAULT]

[USER]

[L6500 SERIES]

The pin assignment of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal is used by the factory default setting of the projector.

Used to change the setting of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.

The setting of <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal is used for the L6500 series compatibility.

120 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4 Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu f When [USER] is selected, proceed to Step 3).


4) Press as to select one from [PIN2] to [PIN8], and press qw to switch the setting.

[FUNCTION BUTTON]

Set the functions of the <FUNC> button on the remote control.

1) Press as to select [FUNCTION BUTTON].


f The [FUNCTION BUTTON] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select a function.

[DISABLE]

[P IN P]

[SUB MEMORY]

Disables the <FUNC> button.

Switches [OFF]/[USER1]/[USER2]/[USER3] in [P IN P]. (x page 125)

Displays the sub memory list. (x page 130)

[SYSTEM SELECTOR] Switches the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] setting. (x page 77)

[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] Switches the [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW] setting. (x page 75)

[FREEZE] Temporarily pauses the image. (x page 105)

Displays the waveform of the input signal. (x page 105) [WAVEFORM MONITOR]

[LENS MEMORY LOAD]

[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] *1

Calls the registered lens memory. (x page 122)

Switches the flip horizontal settings. (x page 93)



[DATE AND TIME]

Set the time zone, date, and time of the built-in clock of the projector.

Setting the time zone

1) Press as to select [DATE AND TIME].


f The [DATE AND TIME] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [TIME ZONE].

4) Press qw to switch [TIME ZONE].

Setting the date and time manually




3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].


f The [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select an item, and press qw to set the local date and time.

6) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button. f The setting of the date and time will be completed.

Setting the date and time automatically


ENGLISH - 121




3) Press as to select [ADJUST CLOCK].


f The [ADJUST CLOCK] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION], and press qw to change the setting to [ON].

6) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button. f The setting of the date and time will be completed.

Note f To set the date and time automatically, the projector must be connected to the network.

f If synchronization with the NTP server fails just after [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is turned [ON], or if [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] is turned

[ON] while the NTP server is not set, [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION] will return to [OFF].

f Access the projector via a web browser to set the NTP server. Refer to “[Adjust clock] page” (x page 144) for details.

[LENS CALIBRATION]

Automatically set the lens shift limit values and home position for the projector.

1) Press as to select [LENS CALIBRATION].


f The confirmation screen is displayed.

3) Press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f To cancel, select [CANCEL].

f The lens moves up, down, left, and right to automatically set the lens shift limit values and home position.

f The lens stops to complete the calibration.

Note f [PROGRESS] is displayed on the menu during lens calibration. Cannot cancel mid-operation.

f When lens calibration executes correctly, [COMPLETE] is displayed and [INCOMPLETE] is displayed when it does not execute correctly.

f Pressing the <FOCUS> button on the remote control for at least three seconds will also display the confirmation screen for lens calibration execution.

[LENS MEMORY]

Save and load the focus position, shift position, and zoom position of an adjusted lens.

Saving lens position

1) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY].


3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY SAVE].


f The [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select the item to save, and press the <ENTER> button.

6) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The [LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.


8) After the name is input, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The registration completes and returns to the [LENS MEMORY SAVE] screen.

f If you press asqw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the lens memory will not be saved.

f If you press asqw to select [DEFAULT] and press the <ENTER> button, the entered name will not be registered and the default name will be used.

f If you select [OK] without entering any characters and press the <ENTER> button, the default name will be used.

122 - ENGLISH


Loading the lens position



3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY LOAD].


f The [LENS MEMORY LOAD] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select the item to load, and press the <ENTER> button.

6) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The lens moves automatically to the registered shift, zoom, and focus positions.

Note f Lens memory is not guaranteed to be 100 % reproduced.

f The zoom and focus positions may have shifted after lens memory was loaded. Readjust as necessary.

f Beware of shift, as errors in zoom position are particularly significant.

f When a lens is replaced, readjust and save the lens memory again.

f If a lens without zoom function is used, the lens memory of the zoom position does not operate.

f When [LENS MEMORY LOAD] is assigned to the <FUNC> button, the lens memory is loaded in order each time you press the <FUNC> button.

Deleting a lens memory



3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY EDIT].


f The [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY DELETE].


f The [LENS MEMORY DELETE] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select the item to delete, and press the <ENTER> button.


Changing the lens memory name



3) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY EDIT].


f The [LENS MEMORY EDIT] screen is displayed.

5) Press as to select [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE].


f The [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

7) Press as to select the name to change, and press the <ENTER> button. f The [LENS MEMORY NAME INPUT] screen is displayed.


9) After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The registration completes and returns to the [LENS MEMORY NAME CHANGE] screen.

ENGLISH - 123

Chapter 4 Settings — [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu f If you press asqw to select [CANCEL] and then press the <ENTER> button, the changed name will not be registered.

f If you press asqw to select [DEFAULT] and press the <ENTER> button, the changed name will not be registered and the default name will be used.

f If you select [OK] without entering any characters and press the <ENTER> button, the default name will be used.

[SAVE ALL USER DATA]

Save the various setting values as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.

1) Press as to select [SAVE ALL USER DATA].


f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

3) Enter a security password and press the <ENTER> button.

4) When the confirmation screen is displayed, press qw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f [PROGRESS] is displayed while saving data.

[LOAD ALL USER DATA]

Load the various setting values saved as a backup in the built-in memory of the projector.

1) Press as to select [LOAD ALL USER DATA].





Note f The projector will go into the standby status to reflect the setting values when [LOAD ALL USER DATA] is executed.

f Data registered from a computer is not included in [ALL USER DATA].

[INITIALIZE]

Return various setting values to their factory default settings.

1) Press as to select [INITIALIZE].




f The [INITIALIZE] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select an item to initialize.

[ALL USER DATA]

[REGISTERED SIGNAL]

[NETWORK/E-MAIL]

[LOGO IMAGE]

Returns all setting items including [REGISTERED SIGNAL], [NETWORK SETUP], [E-mail set up], and [USER LOGO] to factory default settings.

The projector will go into the standby status to reflect the setting values.

Deletes all the setting values saved for each input signal.

To delete only a part of a registered signal, perform the procedure described in “Deleting the registered signal” (x page 128).

Returns [NETWORK SETUP] and [E-mail set up] to factory default settings.

Deletes the image registered in [USER LOGO].



[SERVICE PASSWORD]

This function is used by a service person.

124 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4 Settings — [P IN P] menu

[P IN P] menu

On the menu screen, select [P IN P] from the main menu, and select an item from the submenu.


Using P IN P function

Locate a separate, small sub screen in the main screen to project two images simultaneously.

1) Press as to select [P IN P MODE].


f The [P IN P MODE] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select a function.

[OFF]

[USER1]

[USER2]

[USER3]

P IN P function is not used.

The items set in “Setting P IN P function” (x page 125) are used in P IN P function.


Setting P IN P function

P IN P function settings can be saved to [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3].

1) Press as to select [P IN P MODE].


f The [P IN P MODE] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select the desired mode from [USER1], [USER2], and [USER3], and press the <ENTER> button.

4) Press as to select [MAIN WINDOW] or [SUB WINDOW], and press the <ENTER> button.

5) Press as to select the input terminal to be displayed in the window, and press the <ENTER> button.

6) Press asto select an item.

[SIZE]

[POSITION]

[CLOCK PHASE]

Set the window display size between 10 % and 100 %.

Set the display position of the window within the screen.

When the sub window is input from the <RGB 1 IN> terminal or the <RGB 2 IN> terminal and a flickering image or smeared outline appears, set between 0 and +31.

7) If [SIZE] is selected in Step 6), press the <ENTER> button.

f The sub-menu is displayed.

8) Press asto select an item.

9) Press qw to make adjustment, and press the <MENU> button.

10) If [POSITION] is selected in Step 6), press the <ENTER> button.

11) Press asqw to adjust the position, and press the <MENU> button.

ENGLISH - 125

Chapter 4 Settings — [P IN P] menu

12) If [CLOCK PHASE] is selected in Step 6), press qw to make adjustment.

13) Press as to select [FRAME LOCK].


[MAIN WINDOW]

[SUB WINDOW]

Set frame lock to the input signal set in the main window.

Set frame lock to the input signal set in the sub window.

15) Press as to select [TYPE].


[MAIN WINDOW]

[SUB WINDOW]

The main window has display priority.

The sub window has display priority.

Note f The P IN P function may not be available for some signals being input or terminals being selected. Refer to “Two-window display combination list” (x page 174) for details.

f The main window setting values are applied to image adjustment values such as [PICTURE MODE], [GAMMA], and [COLOR

TEMPERATURE].

f On the main screen (when no menu is displayed), press qw to switch the sizes and positions of the main window and sub window while P

IN P is operating.

f When [FRAME RESPONSE] is set to other than [NORMAL], [P IN P] cannot be set.

f 3D images cannot be displayed in P IN P. (Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU) f The P IN P state continues while the P IN P function is used, even if 3D images of the simultaneous system are displayed. (Only for

PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU)

126 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4 Settings — [TEST PATTERN] menu

[TEST PATTERN] menu

On the menu screen, select [TEST PATTERN] from the main menu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen. f Press qw to switch.

[TEST PATTERN]

Display the test pattern built-in to the projector.

Settings of position, size, and other factors will not be reflected in test patterns. Make sure to display the input signal before performing various adjustments.

1) Press qw to switch the [TEST PATTERN] item. f The items will switch each time you press the button.

Menu screen + All white

Menu screen + All black

Menu screen + Window

Menu screen + Window

(inversion)

Menu screen + Color bar

(vertical)

Menu screen + Color bar

(horizontal)

Menu screen + 16:9/4:3 aspect frame

Menu screen + Focus

Displays test patterns with the menu screen. Select a test pattern so that it is easy to make various adjustments.

Note f Press the <ON SCREEN> button on the remote control while the test pattern is displayed to hide the menu screen.

Changing color or a focus test pattern

When the “Menu Screen + Focus” test pattern is displayed, the color can be changed.

1) Press qw to select the “Menu Screen + Focus” test pattern.


f The [TEST PATTERN COLOR] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select a color, and press the <ENTER> button. f The test pattern color changed to the color selected.

Note f The test pattern color settings return to [WHITE] when the projector is switched off.

f Colors of the test patterns other than focus test patterns cannot be changed.

ENGLISH - 127

Chapter 4 Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu

[SIGNAL LIST] menu

On the menu screen, select [SIGNAL LIST] from the main menu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen. r

Registered signal details

Memory number: A1 (1-2)

Sub memory number

When the address number (A1, A2, ... L7, L8) signal is registered f A name can be set for each sub memory (x page 130).

Registering new signals

After a new signal is input and the <MENU> button on the remote control or the control panel is pressed, the registration is completed and the

[MAIN MENU] screen is displayed.

Note f Up to 96 signals, including sub memories, can be registered to the projector.

f There are 12 pages (eight memories of A through L, with eight memories possible on each page) for memory numbers, and the signal is registered to the lowest number that is available. If there is no available memory number it will be overwritten from the oldest signal.

f The names to be registered are automatically determined by the input signals and memory numbers.

f If a menu is being displayed, the new signals will be registered at the instant they are input.

Renaming the registered signal

Registered signals can be renamed.

1) Press asqw to select the signal of which name is to be changed.


f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL STATUS] screen is displayed.

f The memory number, input terminal, input signal name, frequency, synch polarity, etc., are displayed.

f Press the <MENU> button to return to the [SIGNAL LIST] screen.


f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen is displayed.

4) Press as to select [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE].


f The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.


7) After the name is changed, press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The registration is completed and the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen returns.

f When pressing asqw to select [CANCEL] and pressing the <ENTER> button, the changed signal name will not be registered and an automatically registered signal name will be used.

Deleting the registered signal

Registered signals can be deleted.

1) Press asqw to select the signal to delete.

2) Press the <DEFAULT> button.

f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.

128 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4 Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu f To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [REGISTERED SIGNAL LIST] screen.


f The selected signal will be deleted.

Note f A registered signal can also be deleted from [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] on the [REGISTERED SIGNAL SETUP] screen.

Protecting the registered signal

1) Press asqw to select the signal to protect.





4) Press as to select [LOCK].


[OFF]

[ON]

The signal is not protected.

The signal is protected.

Note f When [LOCK] is set to [ON], signal deletion, image adjustment, and automatic setup are not available. To perform these operations, set

[LOCK] to [OFF].

f A signal can be registered to the sub memory even if it is protected.

f Even a protected signal will be deleted if [INITIALIZE] is executed.

Expanding signal lock-in range

1) Press asqw to select the signal to set.





4) Press as to select [LOCK-IN RANGE].


[NARROW]

[WIDE]

Select in most cases.

Widens the lock-in range.

Note f Switch the range that determines that a signal to be input is the same signal that is already registered.

f To prioritize the determination that it is the same signal that is already registered, set to the [WIDE] setting.

f Use in cases such as when the synchronizing frequency of a signal to be input has changed slightly, or multiple signal lists are registered.

f Can only be used when a signal is input from the <RGB 1 IN> terminal, <RGB 2 IN> terminal, <DVI-D IN> terminal, or <HDMI IN> terminal.

f When [WIDE] is set, the image may appear distorted because a signal is determined to be the same signal even if a synchronizing frequency changes slightly.

f When a signal to be input corresponds to multiple signals set in [WIDE], a registered signal with a high memory number receives priority.

Example: a signal to be input that corresponds to memory numbers A2, A4 and B1 will be determined to be B1.

f When a registration signal is deleted, the settings are also deleted.

f In an environment where multiple types of signals are input to the same terminal, signals are sometimes not determined correctly when the setting is set to [WIDE].

ENGLISH - 129

Chapter 4 Settings — [SIGNAL LIST] menu

Sub memory

The projector has a sub memory function that can register the multiple image adjustment data, even if it is recognized as the same signal by the frequency or format of the synchronization signal source.

Use this function when you need to adjust the picture quality such as switching of the aspect ratio or white balance by the same synchronization signal source. The sub memory includes all the data that can be adjusted for each signal, such as the screen aspect ratio and data adjusted in the [PICTURE] item ([CONTRAST], [BRIGHTNESS], etc.).

Registering to the sub memory

1) Press qw on the normal screen (when the menu is not displayed). f The sub memory registration screen is displayed if the sub memory is not registered. Proceed to Step 3).

f A list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.

f By selecting [SUB MEMORY] in the [PROJECTOR SETUP] menu → [FUNCTION BUTTON], the <FUNC> button can be used instead of qw.

2) Press asqw to select the sub memory number to register in [SUB MEMORY LIST].


f The [SIGNAL NAME CHANGE] screen is displayed.

4) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f To rename the registered signal, follow the procedure in Steps 6) and 7) in “Renaming the registered signal” (x page 128).

Switching to the sub memory

1) Press qw on the normal screen (when the menu is not displayed). f A list of sub memories registered to the signal currently input is displayed.

2) Press asqw to select the signal to switch in [SUB MEMORY LIST].


f This switches to the signal selected in Step 2).

Deleting the sub memory

1) Press qw on the normal screen (when the menu is not displayed). f The [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen is displayed.

2) Press asqw to select the sub memory to delete, and press the <DEFAULT> button. f The [REGISTERED SIGNAL DELETE] screen is displayed.

f To cancel the deletion, press the <MENU> button to return to the [SUB MEMORY LIST] screen.


f The selected sub memory will be deleted.

130 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4 Settings — [SECURITY] menu

[SECURITY] menu

On the menu screen, select [SECURITY] from the main menu, and select an item from the submenu.

Refer to “Navigating through the menu” (x page 65) for the operation of the menu screen. f When the projector is used for the first time

Initial password: Press awsqawsq in order, and press the <ENTER> button.

f After selecting the item, press asqw to set.

Attention f When you select the [SECURITY] menu and press the <ENTER> button, entering a password is required. Enter the preset password and then continue operations of the [SECURITY] menu.

f When the password has been changed previously, enter the changed password, and press the <ENTER> button.

Note f The entered password is displayed with*marks on the screen.

f An error message is displayed on the screen when the entered password is incorrect. Re-enter the correct password.

[SECURITY PASSWORD]

The [SECURITY PASSWORD] screen is displayed when the power is turned on. When the entered password is incorrect, the operation will be restricted to the power standby <v> button, the <SHUTTER> button, and the <LENS> (<FOCUS>, <ZOOM>, and <SHIFT>) buttons.

1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD].


[OFF]

[ON]

Disables the security password entry.

Enables the security password entry.

Note f The [SECURITY PASSWORD] setting is set to [OFF] by the factory default or when [ALL USER DATA] in [INITIALIZE] (x page 124) is executed.

f Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.

f The security password is enabled after setting [SECURITY PASSWORD] to [ON] and turning the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>.

[SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE]

Change the security password.

1) Press as to select [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE].


f The [SECURITY PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.

3) Press asqw and the number (<0> - <9>) buttons to set the password. f Up to eight button operations can be set.


5) Re-enter the password for the confirmation.


Note f The entered password is displayed with*marks on the screen.

f An error message is displayed on the screen when the entered password is incorrect. Re-enter the correct password.

ENGLISH - 131


[DISPLAY SETTING]

Overlap the security message (text or image) over the projecting image.

1) Press as to select [DISPLAY SETTING].


[OFF]

[TEXT]

[USER LOGO]

The text display is disabled.

The text display is enabled.


Note f To create/register the [USER LOGO] image, use “Logo Transfer Software” included in the supplied CD-ROM.

[TEXT CHANGE]

Change the text displayed when the text display is enabled by selecting [TEXT] in [DISPLAY SETTING].

1) Press as to select [TEXT CHANGE].


f The [TEXT CHANGE] screen is displayed.


4) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f The text is changed.

[CONTROL DEVICE SETUP]

Enable/disable the button operations on the control panel and the remote control.

1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].


f The [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select [CONTROL PANEL] or [REMOTE CONTROL].

[CONTROL PANEL]

[REMOTE CONTROL]

You can set the limitation on the control from the control panel.

You can set the limitation on the control from the remote control.


f The [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the [REMOTE CONTROL] screen is displayed.


6) Press qw to switch the item. f You can set the operation restriction from the control panel or the remote control.

[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

[USER]

Enables all button operations.

Disables all button operations.

Operation of all buttons can be enabled/disabled separately.

Refer to “Enabling/disabling any button” (x page 132) for details.

7) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button. f The confirmation screen is displayed.


Enabling/disabling any button

1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP].

132 - ENGLISH



f The [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] screen is displayed.




6) Press qw to switch [USER].

7) Press as to select the button item to set. f When [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected, press the <ENTER> button, and then press as to select the button to set.

[POWER BUTTON]

[INPUT SELECT BUTTON]

[MENU BUTTON]

[LENS BUTTON]

[AUTO SETUP BUTTON]

[SHUTTER BUTTON]

[ASPECT BUTTON]

[ON SCREEN BUTTON]

[OTHER BUTTON]

Buttons that can be set

[CONTROL PANEL]

Power standby <v> button, power on <b> button

[REMOTE CONTROL]

<VIDEO> button, <RGB1> button, <RGB2> button, <DVI-D> button, <HDMI> button, and <SDI 1/2> button *1

<MENU> button

<LENS> button

<FOCUS> button, <ZOOM> button, <SHIFT> button

<AUTO SETUP> button

<SHUTTER> button

—

— asqw , <ENTER> button

<ASPECT> button

<ON SCREEN> button

Buttons not listed above



[ENABLE]

[DISABLE]

Enables button operations.

Disables button operations.

f The following items are available when [SDI1/2 BUTTON] is selected in [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] in PT-DZ13KU and PT-DS12KU.

[TOGGLE]

[SDI1]

[SDI2]

[DISABLE]

Switches between SDI1 and SDI2 when the button is operated.

Fixes to SDI1.

Fixes to SDI2.

Disables button operations.

f When [INPUT SELECT BUTTON] is selected in Step 7), press the <MENU> button to return to the [CONTROL PANEL] screen or the

[REMOTE CONTROL] screen.

9) Press as to select [APPLY], and press the <ENTER> button. f The confirmation screen is displayed.


Note f When a button operation is performed on the device set to [DISABLE], the [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen is displayed.

Enter the control device password.

f The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD] screen will disappear when there is no operation for approx. 10 seconds.

f If the operations of both [CONTROL PANEL] and [REMOTE CONTROL] are set to [DISABLE], the projector cannot be turned off (cannot enter standby).

f When the setting has completed, the menu screen will disappear. To operate continuously, press the <MENU> button to display the main menu.

f Even when button operation on the remote control is disabled, the <ID SET> button and the <ID ALL> button are enabled.

[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE]

The control device password can be changed.

1) Press as to select [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE].


f The [CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] screen is displayed.


ENGLISH - 133


4) Press asqw to select [OK], and press the <ENTER> button. f To cancel, select [CANCEL].

Attention f The initial password is “AAAA” by the factory default or when [ALL USER DATA] in [INITIALIZE] (x page 124) is executed.

f Change the password periodically that is hard to guess.

134 - ENGLISH

Chapter 4 Settings — [NETWORK] menu

[NETWORK] menu

On the menu screen, select [NETWORK] from the main menu, and select an item from the submenu.


[NETWORK SETUP]

Perform the initial setting of the network before using the network function.

1) Press as to select [NETWORK SETUP].


f The [NETWORK SETUP] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select an item, and change the settings according to the operation instructions of the menu.

[PROJECTOR NAME]

[DHCP]

[IP ADDRESS]

[SUBNET MASK]

[DEFAULT GATEWAY]

[STORE]

Change the setting when using a DHCP server.

Set to [ON] when obtaining an IP address automatically using a DHCP server. Set to [OFF] when not using a DHCP server.

Enter the IP address when not using a DHCP server.

Enter the subnet mask when not using a DHCP server.

Enter the default gateway address when not using a DHCP server.

Save the current network settings.

4) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.


Note f When using a DHCP server, confirm that the DHCP server is running.

f Consult your network administrator regarding the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.

[NETWORK CONTROL]

Set up the control method of the network.

1) Press as to select [NETWORK CONTROL].


f The [NETWORK CONTROL] screen is displayed.

3) Press as to select an item, and press qw to change the setting.

[WEB CONTROL]

[PJLink CONTROL]

[COMMAND CONTROL]

[COMMAND PORT]

[CRESTRON RoomView]

[AMX D.D.]

[STORE]

Set to [ON] to control with the web browser.

Set to [ON] to control with the PJLink protocol.

Set to [ON] to control with the <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal control command format

(x page 172). Refer to “Control commands via LAN” (x page 167).

Set the port number used for command control.

Set to [ON] to control with RoomView of Crestron Electronics, Inc.

Set to [ON] to control with the controller of AMX Corporation.

Setting this function to [ON] enables detection through “AMX Device Discovery”. For details, refer to the website of AMX Corporation.

URL http://www.amx.com/

Save the current network control settings.

ENGLISH - 135


4) Press as to select [STORE], and press the <ENTER> button.


[NETWORK STATUS]

Display the status of the projector network.

1) Press as to select [NETWORK STATUS].


f The [NETWORK STATUS] screen is displayed.

Network connections

The projector has a network function, and the following operations are available from the computer using the web control.

f Setting and adjustment of the projector f Display of the projector status f Sending of E-mail messages when there is a problem with the projector

The projector supports “Crestron RoomView”, and the following application software of Crestron Electronics, Inc. can be used.

f RoomView Express f Fusion RV f RoomView Server Edition

Attention f When a LAN cable is directly connected to the projector, the network connection must be made indoors.

Note f “Crestron RoomView” is a system of Crestron Electronics, Inc. that collectively manages and controls devices on multiple systems connected to a network using a computer.

f For details of “Crestron RoomView”, refer to the website of Crestron Electronics, Inc. (English only)

URL http://www.crestron.com

To download “RoomView Express”, go to the following website of Crestron Electronics, Inc. (English only)

URL http://www.crestron.com/getroomview f A LAN cable is required to use the network function.

r

Example of a normal network connection

Computer

Projector

SDI 1/2

LAN cable (straight) LAN cable (straight)

Hub f A web browser is required to use this function. Confirm that the web browser can be used beforehand.

Compatible OS: Windows XP/Windows Vista/Windows 7/Windows 8, Mac OS X v10.4/v10.5/v10.6/v10.7/v10.8

Compatible browser: Internet Explorer 7.0/8.0/9.0/10.0, Safari 4.0/5.0/6.0 (Mac OS) f Communication with an E-mail server is required to use the E-mail function. Confirm that the E-mail can be used beforehand.

f Use a LAN cable that is compatible with category 5 or higher.

f Use a LAN cable of 100 m (328'1") or shorter.

136 - ENGLISH


Name and function of network function parts

1

2

3

1 LAN LINK/ACT lamp (green)

Lights on when connected.

Flashes when transmitting/receiving data.

2 <LAN> terminal (10Base-T/100Base-TX)

Used to connect the LAN cable here.

3 LAN10/100 lamp (yellow)

Lights on when connected to the 100Base-TX.

Accessing from the web browser

1) Start up the web browser on the computer.

2) Enter the IP address set on the projector into the URL entry field of the web browser.

3) Enter the user name and the password.

f The factory default setting of the user name is user1 (user rights)/admin1 (administrator rights) and the password is panasonic (lower case).

4) Click OK.

f The [Projector status] page is displayed.

ENGLISH - 137


Note f If you use a web browser to control the projector, set [WEB CONTROL] to [ON] in [NETWORK CONTROL] (x page 135).

f Do not perform setting or control simultaneously by starting up multiple web browsers. Do not set or control the projector from multiple computers.

f Change the password first. (x page 150) f The administrator rights allow use of all functions. The user rights allow use of [Projector status] (x page 139), confirmation of the error information page (x page 140), [Network status] (x page 141), [Basic control] (x page 142), and [Change password] (x page 150) only.

f Access will be locked for few minutes when an incorrect password is entered three times consecutively.

f Some items on the projector setting page use the Javascript function of the web browser. The projector may not be able to be controlled properly if it is set with a browser that does not have this function enabled.

f If the screen for the web control is not displayed, consult your network administrator.

f While updating the screen for the web control, the screen may become white for a moment, but it is not a malfunction.

Descriptions of items

1

4

5

2

3

6

1 Page tab

Switches pages by clicking this item.

2 [Status]

The status of the projector is displayed by clicking this item.

3 [Projector control]

The [Projector control] page is displayed by clicking this item.

4 [Detailed set up]

The [Detailed set up] page is displayed by clicking this item.

5 [Change password]

The [Change password] page is displayed by clicking this item.

6 [CRESTRON RoomView]

The control page of RoomView is displayed by clicking this item.

138 - ENGLISH


[Projector status] page

Click [Status] → [Projector status].

Display the status of the projector for the following items.

3

4

1

2

5

1 [PROJECTOR TYPE]

Displays the type of the projector.

2 [MAIN VERSION]

Displays the firmware version of the projector.

3 [POWER]


4 [SHUTTER]

Displays the status of the shutter (ON: closed, OFF: open).

5 [LAMP SELECT]

Displays the setting status of [LAMP SELECT] (x page 109).

6 [SERIAL NUMBER]

Displays the serial number of the projector.

7 [NETWORK VERSION]

Displays the version of the firmware of the network.

8 [REMOTE2 STATUS]

Displays the control status of the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal.

9 [OSD]

Displays the status of the on-screen display.

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

6

7

8

9

10 [LAMP POWER]

Displays the setting status of [LAMP POWER] (x page 111).

11 [INPUT]

Displays the status of the selected input.

12 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]

Displays the status of the air intake temperature of the projector.

13 [OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE]

Displays the status of the internal temperature of the projector.

14 [AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE]

Displays the status of the temperature around the lamp of the projector.

15 [LAMP1][LAMP2][RUNTIME]

Displays the status and the runtime (converted value) of the lamp.

16 [SELF TEST]

Displays the self-diagnosis information.

17 [PROJECTOR RUNTIME]

Displays the runtime of the projector.

ENGLISH - 139


Error information page

When [Error (Detail)] or [Warning (Detail)] is displayed in the self-diagnosis display of the [Projector status] screen, click it to display the error/warning details.

f The projector may go into the standby status to protect the projector depending on the contents of the error.

1

1 Self-diagnosis result display

Displays the item check results.

[OK]:

Indicates that operation is normal.

[FAILED]:

Indicates that there is a problem.

[WARNING]:

Indicates that there is a warning.

r

[FAILED] items displayed when a problem occurs

Parameter

[MAIN CPU BUS]

[FAN]

[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]

[OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE]

[AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE]

[LAMP1 REMAIN TIME]

[LAMP2 REMAIN TIME]

[LAMP1 STATUS]

[LAMP2 STATUS]

[APERTURE(CONTRAST-SHUTTER)]

[INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR]

[OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR]

[AROUND LAMP TEMP. SENSOR]

[BATTERY]

[LENS MOUNTER]

[COVER OPEN]

[BRIGHTNESS SENSOR]

[ANGLE SENSOR]

[FILTER UNIT]

[AIR FILTER]

[AC POWER]

Description

There is a problem with the microcomputer circuitry. Consult your dealer.

There is a problem with the fan or the fan drive circuit. Consult your dealer.

The air intake temperature is too high. The projector may be used in an operating environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance.

The temperature around the optics module inside the projector is high. The projector may be used in an operating environment where the temperature is high, such as near a heating appliance.

The temperature around the lamp is high. The air exhaust port may be blocked.

The runtime of the lamp has exceeded the specified time, and it is time to replace the lamp.

The lamp has failed to turn on. Wait a while until the luminous lamp cools off, and then turn on the power.

There is a problem in the contrast shutter circuit for dynamic iris. Consult your dealer.

There is a problem with the sensor used to detect intake temperature. Consult your dealer.

There is a problem with the sensor used to detect temperature inside the projector.

Consult your dealer.

There is a problem with the sensor used to detect exhaust air temperature. Consult your dealer.

Battery replacement is required. Consult your dealer.

There is a problem in the lens mounter. Consult your dealer.

Installation of the lamp unit cover is incomplete. Check the installation of the lamp unit cover. (x page 161)

There is a problem with the luminance sensor. If problems persist even after switching on the power, consult your dealer.

There is a problem with the sensor that detects angle. Consult your dealer.

The air filter unit is not attached. Check the connection of the air filter unit.

(x page 157)

There is too much dust accumulated in the air filter unit. Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch <OFF> (x page 55), and clean the air filter. (x page 157)

AC input voltage is weak. Use electric wiring that can sufficiently withstand the power consumption of the projector.

140 - ENGLISH


[Network status] page

Click [Status] → [Network status].

The current network setting status is displayed.

[Access error log] page

Click [Status] → [Access error log].

The error log on the web server is displayed such as access to the pages that do not exist or access with unauthorized user names or passwords.

[Access log] page

Click [Status] → [Access log].

The log such as user name accessed to the WEB control page, accessed IP address, accessed time is displayed.

Note f [Access error log]/[Access log] will display the recent few thousand accesses/requests. All information may not be displayed when many accesses/requests are made at one time.

f When [Access error log]/[Access log] exceeds a certain amount, old information will be deleted.

f Check [Access error log]/[Access log] periodically.

ENGLISH - 141

[Basic control] page

Click [Projector control] → [Basic control].


3

4

5

1

2

1 [POWER]

Turns on/off the power.

2 [SHUTTER]

Switches the setting whether to use the shutter function

(closing/opening of the shutter).

[Detail control] page

Click [Projector control] → [Detail control].

3 [OSD]

Switches on (display)/off (hide) the on-screen display function.

4 [SYSTEM]

Switches the system method.

5 [INPUT SELECT]

Switches the input signal.

1

2

3

4

5

6

1 Control of the projector

The projector is controlled by clicking the buttons in the same way as the buttons on the remote control. After control, the onscreen display of the projector at the right of the control page is updated.

2 [SUB MEMORY]

Switches the sub memory.

3 [SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]

Switches to system daylight view settings.

4 [FREEZE]

Temporarily pauses the image.

5 [P IN P]

Switches the P IN P setting.

6 [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU,

PT-DW11KU)

Switches the flip horizontal settings.

7

8

9

10

11

7 On-screen display of the projector

Displays the same items as shown on the on-screen display of the projector. You can check or change the settings of the menus. It is displayed even if the on-screen display function is set to off (hide).

8 [WAVEFORM MONITOR]

Displays the waveform of the input signal.

9 [LENS]

Adjusts the projection lens.

10 [TEST PATTERN]

Displays the test pattern.

11 [GET OSD]

Updates the on-screen display of the projector at the right of the control page.

142 - ENGLISH


[Network config] page

Click [Detailed set up] → [Network config].

f Click [Network config] to display the [CAUTION!] screen.

f The current settings are displayed by pressing the [Next] button.

f Click [Change] to display the setting change screen.

7

8

5

6

3

4

1

2

1 [PROJECTOR NAME]

Enter the name of the projector. Enter the host name if it is required when using a DHCP server etc.

2 [DHCP ON]/[DHCP OFF]

To enable the DHCP client function, set to [DHCP ON].

3 [IP ADDRESS]

Enter the IP address when not using a DHCP server.

4 [SUBNET MASK]

Enter the subnet mask when not using a DHCP server.

5 [DEFAULT GATEWAY]

Enter the default gateway address when not using a DHCP server.

6 [DNS1]

Enter the DNS1 server address.

Permissible characters for the entry of DNS1 server address

(primary):

Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)

(Example: 192.168.0.253)

7 [DNS2]

Enter the DNS2 server address.

Available characters for the entry of DNS2 server address

(secondary):

Numbers (0 - 9), period (.)

(Example: 192.168.0.254)

8 [Back]/[Next]

Click the [Back] button to return to the original screen. The current settings are displayed by pressing the [Next] button.

Click the [Submit] button to update the settings.

Note f When you use the “Forward” and “Back” functions of your browser, a warning message “Page has Expired” may appear. In that case, click

[Network config] again since the following operation will not be guaranteed.

f Changing LAN settings while connected to the LAN may cause the connection to cut out.

ENGLISH - 143

[Adjust clock] page

Click [Detailed set up] → [Adjust clock].


1

2

5

6

3

4

7

1 [Time Zone]

Select the time zone.

2 [Set time zone]

Updates the time zone setting.

3 [NTP SYNCHRONIZATION]

Set to [ON] to adjust the date and time automatically.

4 [NTP SERVER NAME]

Enter the IP address or server name of the NTP server when you set to adjust the date and time manually.

(To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be set up.)

5 [Date]

Enter the date to be changed.

6 [Time]

Enter the time to be changed.

7 [Set date and time]

Updates the date and time settings.

Note f The replacement of the battery inside the projector is required when the time goes out of alignment right after correcting the time. Consult your dealer.

[Ping test] page

Check whether the network is connected to the mail server, POP server, DNS server, etc.

Click [Detailed set up] → [Ping test].

1 [Input IP address]

Enter the IP address of the server to be tested.

2 [Submit]

Executes the connection test.

1

2

3

4

3 Example of display when the connection has succeeded

4 Example of display when the connection has failed

144 - ENGLISH


[E-mail set up] page

When there is a problem or the runtime of a lamp reaches a set value, an E-mail can be sent to preset E-mail addresses (up to two addresses).

Click [Detailed set up] → [E-mail set up].

3

4

1

2

5

6

1 [ENABLE]

Select [Enable] to use the E-mail function.

2 [SMTP SERVER NAME]

Enter the IP address or the server name of the E-mail server

(SMTP). To enter the server name, the DNS server needs to be set up.

3 [MAIL FROM]

Enter the E-mail address of the projector. (Up to 63 characters in single byte)

4 [MEMO]

Enter information such as the location of the projector that notifies the sender of the E-mail. (Up to 63 characters in single byte)

5 [MINIMUM TIME]

Change the minimum interval for the temperature warning

E-mail. The default value is 60 minutes. In this case, another

E-mail will not be sent for 60 minutes after sending the temperature warning E-mail even if it reaches the warning temperature.

6 [INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]

Change the temperature setting for the temperature warning mail. A temperature warning E-mail is sent when the temperature exceeds this value.

ENGLISH - 145


7

8

7

8

9

7 [E-MAIL ADDRESS 1], [E-MAIL ADDRESS 2]

Enter the E-mail address to be sent. Leave [E-MAIL ADDRESS

2] blank when two E-mail addresses are not to be used.

8 Settings of the conditions to send E-mail

Select the conditions to send E-mail.

[MAIL CONTENTS]:

Select either [NORMAL] or [SIMPLE].

[ERROR]:

Send an E-mail when an error occurred in the self-diagnosis.

[LAMP1 RUNTIME]:

An E-mail message is sent when the remaining lamp on time for the lamp 1 has reached the value set at the right field.

[LAMP2 RUNTIME]:

An E-mail message is sent when the remaining lamp on time for the lamp 2 has reached the value set at the right field.

[INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE]:

Send an E-mail when the air intake temperature has reached the value set at the above field.

[PERIODIC REPORT]:

Place a check mark on this to send an E-mail periodically.

It will be sent on the days and time with the check mark.

9 [Submit]

Update the settings.

Note f Set each item of [LAMP1 RUNTIME] to [LAMP2 RUNTIME] to 500 hours or less when using the optional Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode) (Model No.: ET-LAD320P (1 pc), ET-LAD320PW (2 pcs)).

146 - ENGLISH


[Authentication set up] page

Set the authentication items when POP authentication or SMTP authentication is necessary to send an E-mail.

Click [Detailed set up] → [Authentication set up].

1 [Auth]

Select the authentication method specified by your Internet service provider.

2 [SMTP Auth]

Set when the SMTP authentication is selected.

3 [POP server name]

Enter the POP server name.

Allowed characters:

Alphanumerics (A - Z, a - z, 0 - 9)

Minus sign (-) and period (.)

4 [User name]

Enter the user name for the POP server or the SMTP server.

3

4

5

6

1

2

7

8

5 [Password]

Enter the password for the POP server or the SMTP server.

6 [SMTP server port]

Enter the port number of the SMTP server.

(Normally 25)

7 [POP server port]

Enter the port number of the POP server.

(Normally 110)

8 [Submit]

Update the settings.

ENGLISH - 147


Contents of E-mail sent

Example of E-mail sent when E-mail is set

The following E-mail is sent when the E-mail settings have been established.

=== Panasonic projector report(CONFIGURE) ===

Projector Type

Serial No

: DS12K

: SW1234567

----- E-mail setup data -----

TEMPERATURE WARNING SETUP

MINIMUM TIME at [ 60] minutes interval

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE Over [ 46degC / 114degF ]

ERROR [ OFF ]

LAMP1 RUNTIME

LAMP1 RUNTIME

LAMP2 RUNTIME

LAMP2 RUNTIME

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

PERIODIC REPORT

Sunday

[ OFF ] at REMAIN [ 400] H




[ OFF ]

[ OFF ] Monday [ ON ] Tuesday [ OFF ] Wednesday [ OFF ]

Thursday [ ON ] Friday [ OFF ] Saturday [ OFF ]

00:00 [ ON ] 01:00 [ OFF ] 02:00 [ OFF ] 03:00 [ OFF ]

04:00 [ OFF ] 05:00 [ OFF ] 06:00 [ OFF ] 07:00 [ OFF ]

08:00 [ OFF ] 09:00 [ OFF ] 10:00 [ OFF ] 11:00 [ OFF ]

12:00 [ OFF ] 13:00 [ OFF ] 14:00 [ OFF ] 15:00 [ OFF ]

16:00 [ OFF ] 17:00 [ OFF ] 18:00 [ OFF ] 19:00 [ OFF ]

20:00 [ OFF ] 21:00 [ OFF ] 22:00 [ OFF ] 23:00 [ OFF ]

----- check system -----

MAIN CPU BUS

FAN


OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE

AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE

LAMP1 REMAIN TIME

LAMP2 REMAIN TIME

LAMP1 STATUS

LAMP2 STATUS

APERTURE(CONTRAST-SHUTTER)

INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR

OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR

AROUND LAMP TEMP.SENSOR

BATTERY

LENS MOUNTER

COVER OPEN

BRIGHTNESS SENSOR

ANGLE SENSOR

FILTER UNIT

AIR FILTER

AC POWER

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

(Error code 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00)

Intake air temperature : 27 degC / 80 degF

Optics module temperature : 33 degC / 91 degF

Around lamp temperature : 32 degC / 89 degF

PROJECTOR RUNTIME 200 H

POWER ON

LAMP1 ON

LAMP1 LOW

LAMP1 MID

LAMP1 HIGH

LAMP1 REMAIN

LAMP2 ON

LAMP2 LOW

LAMP2 MID

LAMP2 HIGH

LAMP2 REMAIN

1 times

1 times

200 H

0 H

0 H

1800 H

1 times

200 H

0 H

0 H

1800 H

-------- Current status ---------

MAIN VERSION

NETWORK VERSION

SUB VERSION

LAMP STATUS

INPUT

REMOTE2 STATUS

1.00

1.00

1.00

LAMP1=ON LAMP2=ON

RGB1

DISABLE

----- Wired Network configuration -----

DHCP Client

IP address

MAC address

OFF

192.168.0.8

70:85:12:00:00:00

Fri Nov 01 16:38:50 2013

----- Memo -----

148 - ENGLISH


Example of the E-mail sent for an error

The following E-mail is sent when an error has occurred.

=== Panasonic projector report(ERROR) ===

Projector Type : DS12K

Serial No : SW1234567

----- check system -----

MAIN CPU BUS

FAN


[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

OPTICS MODULE TEMPERATURE [ OK ]

AROUND LAMP TEMPERATURE

LAMP1 REMAIN TIME

LAMP2 REMAIN TIME

LAMP1 STATUS

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ FAILED ]

LAMP2 STATUS [ FAILED ]

APERTURE(CONTRAST-SHUTTER) [ OK ]

INTAKE AIR TEMP.SENSOR

OPTICS MODULE TEMP.SENSOR

AROUND LAMP TEMP.SENSOR

BATTERY

LENS MOUNTER

COVER OPEN

BRIGHTNESS SENSOR

ANGLE SENSOR

FILTER UNIT

AIR FILTER

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ FAILED ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

[ OK ]

AC POWER [ OK ]

(Error code 00 00 00 60 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 23 00 00 00)

Intake air temperature : 27 degC / 80 degF

Optics module temperature : 33 degC / 91 degF

Around lamp temperature : 32 degC / 89 degF

PROJECTOR RUNTIME 200 H

POWER ON

LAMP1 ON

LAMP1 LOW

LAMP1 MID

LAMP1 HIGH

LAMP1 REMAIN

LAMP2 ON

LAMP2 LOW

LAMP2 MID

LAMP2 HIGH

LAMP2 REMAIN

1 times

1 times

200 H

0 H

0 H

1800 H

1 times

200 H

0 H

0 H

1800 H

-------- Current status ---------

MAIN VERSION

NETWORK VERSION

SUB VERSION

LAMP STATUS

INPUT

REMOTE2 STATUS

1.00

1.00

1.00

LAMP1=ON LAMP2=ON

RGB1

DISABLE

----- Wired Network configuration -----

DHCP Client

IP address

MAC address

OFF

192.168.0.8

70:85:12:00:00:00

Fri Nov 01 16:50:14 2013

----- Memo -----

ENGLISH - 149

[Change password] page

Click [Change password].


1

2

3

1 [Administrator]

Used to change the setting of the [Administrator].

2 [User]

Used to change the setting of the [User].

[Administrator] account

3 [Next]

Used to change the setting of the password.

4

5

6

1

2

3

7

1 [Account]

Displays the account to change.

2 [Current][User name]

Enter the user name before the change.

3 [Current][Password]

Enter the current password.

4 [New][User name]

Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single byte)

5 [New][Password]

Enter the desired new password. (Up to 16 characters in single byte)

6 [New][Password(Retype)]

Enter the desired new password again.

7 [OK]

Determines the change of password.

150 - ENGLISH


[User] account

1

2

3

4

5

1 [Account]

Displays the account to change.

2 [New][User name]

Enter the desired new user name. (Up to 16 characters in single byte)

3 [New][Password]


4 [New][Password(Retype)]


5 [OK]


[Change password] (For user rights)

Only the change of password is enabled under the user rights.

3

4

1

2

1 [Old Password]

Enter the current password.

2 [New Password]


Note

3 [Retype]


4 [OK]


f To change the account of the administrator, you must enter the [User name] and [Password] in [Current].

[CRESTRON RoomView] page

The projector can be monitored/controlled with RoomView.

To start the RoomView control page from the web control screen, you need to access with the administrator rights. (For user rights, the

[CRESTRON RoomView] button is not displayed on the web control screen.)

The control page of RoomView is displayed by clicking [CRESTRON RoomView].

It is not displayed if Adobe Flash Player is not installed on the computer used, or the browser used does not support Flash. In that case, click

[Back] on the control page to go back to the previous page.

ENGLISH - 151


Control page

1

2

3

4

5

1 [Tools][Info][Help]

Tabs for selecting the setting, information, or help page of the projector.

2 [POWER]

Turns on/off the power.

3 [SHUTTER]

Switches the setting whether to use the shutter function

(closing/opening of the shutter).

[Tools] page

Click [Tools] on the control page.

6

7

4 [Input Select]

Controls input selection.

Not available when the power of the projector is turned off.

5 Menu screen control buttons

Navigates the menu screen.

6 Freeze/image quality adjustment

Controls items related to freeze/image quality.

7 [Back]

Performs return to the previous page.

1

2

3

4

5

1 [Control System]

Set the information required for communicating with the controller to be connected with the projector.

2 [User Password]

Set the user rights password for the RoomView control page.

3 [Admin Password]

Set the administrator rights password for the RoomView control page.

4 Network status

Displays the settings of wired LAN.

[DHCP]

Displays the current setting.

[Ip Address]


[Subnet Mask]


[Default Gateway]


[DNS Server]


5 [Exit]

Returns to the control page.

152 - ENGLISH

[Info] page

Click [Info] on the control page.


1

2

3

1 [Projector Name]

Displays the projector name.

2 [Mac Address]

Displays the MAC address.

3 [Lamp Hours]

Displays the runtime of the lamps (converted value).

4 [Power Status]


[Help] page

Click [Help] on the control page.

The [Help Desk] window is displayed.

6

7

8

4

5

5 [Source]

Displays the selected input.

6 [Lamp Mode]

Displays [LAMP POWER] (x page 111).

7 [Error Status]

Displays the error status.

8 [Exit]

Returns to the control page.

1

1 [Help Desk]

Send/receive messages to/from an administrator who uses

Crestron RoomView.

ENGLISH - 153

Chapter 5 Maintenance

This chapter describes methods of inspection when there are problems, maintenance, and replacement of the units.

154 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5 Maintenance — Lamp/temperature/filter indicators

Lamp/temperature/filter indicators

When an indicator lights up

If a problem should occur inside the projector, the lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2>, the temperature indicator <TEMP>, and the filter indicator <FILTER> will inform you by lighting or flashing. Check the status of the indicators and manage the indicated problems as follows.

Attention f When switching off the projector to deal with problems, make sure to follow the procedure in “Switching off the projector” (x page 55).

Lamp indicator <LAMP1>

Lamp indicator <LAMP2>

Temperature indicator <TEMP>

Filter indicator <FILTER>

Lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2>


Status

Lighting in red/lighting in orange *1

Time to replace the lamp unit. (x page 160)

Flashing in red

(1 time) f The lamp unit is not installed.

f The unspecified lamp unit is installed.

Flashing in red

(3 times)

A problem is detected in the lamp or the power supply for the lamp.

Cause f Was [REPLACE LAMP] displayed when you turned on the power?

f The indicator lights up when the runtime of the lamp unit has reached

2 300 hours (when

[LAMP POWER] is set to

[HIGH]) *2 *3 .

f Is the specified lamp unit installed?

f Have you turned on the power again immediately after turning it off?

f Some error has occurred in the lamp circuit. Check for fluctuation (or drop) in the source voltage.

Solution f Replace the lamp unit.

f Install the lamp unit if it is not installed.

f Install the specified lamp unit.

f If the indicator is still flashing in red even when having installed the lamp unit, consult your dealer.

f Wait a while until the luminous lamp cools off, and then turn on the power.

f Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>

(x page 55), and consult your dealer.

*1 The indicator lights up in red while the lamp is turned off, and lights up in orange while the lamp is turned on.

*2 For PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU. 3 300 hours (when [LAMP POWER] is set to [NORMAL]) for PT-DZ10KU.

*3 300 hours when using the optional Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode) (Model No.: ET-LAD320P (1 pc), ET-LAD320PW (2 pcs)), regardless of the [LAMP POWER] setting.

Note f If the lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2> are still lit or flashing after taking the preceding measures, ask your dealer for repair.

ENGLISH - 155

Chapter 5 Maintenance — Lamp/temperature/filter indicators

Temperature indicator <TEMP>


Status

Cause

Solution

Warm-up status

Lighting in red f Did you turn on the power when the temperature was low (around 0 °C

(32 °F))?

Internal temperature is high

(warning).

Flashing in red

(2 times)

Internal temperature is high

(standby status).

f Is the air intake/exhaust port blocked?

f Is the room temperature high?

f Is the filter indicator <FILTER> lit?

f Wait at least five minutes in the current status.

f Install the projector in a location with an ambient temperature of 0 °C

(32 °F) to 45 °C (113 °F) *1 .

f Remove any objects that are blocking the air intake/ exhaust port.

f Install the projector in a location with an ambient temperature of 0 °C (32 °F) to 45 °C (113 °F) *1 .

f Do not use the projector at high altitudes of 2 700 m

(8 858') or higher above sea level.

f Clean or replace the air filter unit. (x page 157)

Flashing in red

(3 times)

The cooling fan has stopped.

― f Turn the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF>

(x page 55), and consult your dealer.

*1 When using the projector at high altitudes (1 400 m (4 593') or higher – lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level), the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F).

If you use the Smoke cut filter, the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 35 °C (95 °F). However, it cannot be used at high altitudes.

If you use the Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode), the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C

(104 °F) when using the projector at elevations lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level, and between 0 °C (32 °F) and 35 °C (95 °F) when using the projector at high altitudes. If you use the Smoke cut filter together, the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 30 °C (86 °F).

Note f If the temperature indicator <TEMP> is still lit or flashing after taking the preceding measures, ask your dealer for repair.

f If you use the projector with the following two settings made, the light output may drop by approx. 20 % to protect the projector when an ambient temperature becomes 40 °C (104 °F) or higher (35 °C (95 °F) or higher if [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] is set to [ON], or if the Smoke cut filter is used).

g When [LAMP SELECT] is set to [DUAL] from the menu g When [LAMP POWER] is set to [HIGH], [MIDDLE], or [NORMAL] from the menu

Filter indicator <FILTER>


Status

Cause

Solution

The filter is clogged.

The temperature inside or outside the projector is abnormally high.

f Is the air filter unit dirty?

f Is the air intake/exhaust port blocked?

f Is [HIGH ALTITUDE

MODE] set correctly?

f Clean or replace the air filter unit. (x page 157) f

Lighting in red

Remove any objects that are blocking the air intake/ exhaust port.

f When using the projector at high altitudes between

1 400 m (4 593') or higher and lower than 2 700 m

(8 858') above sea level, set [HIGH ALTITUDE

MODE] (x page 109) to

[ON].

f Do not use the projector at high altitudes of

2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.

Flashing in red

The air filter unit is not attached.

f Is the air filter unit attached?

f Attach the air filter unit.

Note f If the filter indicator <FILTER> is still lit or flashing after taking the preceding measures, ask your dealer for repair.

f If the filter is clogged, only one lamp may light even when [LAMP SELECT] is set to [DUAL]. By cleaning the air filter unit or replacing it with a new one, the lamp will light properly.

156 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5 Maintenance — Maintenance/replacement

Maintenance/replacement

Before performing maintenance/replacement

f Make sure to turn off the power before maintaining or replacing the unit. (x pages 52, 55) f When switching off the projector, make sure to follow the procedures in “Switching off the projector” (x page 55).

Maintenance

Outer case

Wipe off dirt and dust with a soft, dry cloth.

f If the dirt is persistent, soak the cloth with water and wring it thoroughly before wiping. Dry off the projector with a dry cloth.

f Do not use benzene, thinner, or rubbing alcohol, other solvents, or household cleaners. Doing so may deteriorate the outer case.

f When using chemically treated dust cloths, follow the instructions written on its packaging.

Lens front surface

Wipe off dirt and dust from the front surface of the lens with a soft clean cloth.

f Do not use a cloth that is fluffy, dusty, or soaked with oil/water.

f Since the lens is fragile, do not use excessive force when wiping the lens.

Attention f The lens is made of glass. Impacts or excessive force when wiping may scratch its surface. Handle with care.

Air filter unit

Perform maintenance of the air filter unit in the following cases.

f The air filter is clogged with dust, causing the filter replacement message to appear on the screen and the filter indicator <FILTER> to light in red.

Removing the air filter unit

Air filter cover fixing screw

Air filter unit compartment and the projector’s air intake port

Tabs on the projector body Tabs on the projector body

Air filter cover

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

Air filter unit

Fig. 3

1) Remove the air filter cover. (Fig. 1) f Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the air filter cover screw counterclockwise until it turns freely, and then remove the air filter cover.

f Loosen the air filter cover fixing screw while putting your hand on.

2) Pull out the air filter unit.

f Pull out the air filter unit frame from the tabs of the projector body while slightly pressing around the center of the frame at the front side (with the lens) inward as described with the arrow, and pull out the frame at the opposite side from the tabs to remove the air filter unit. (Fig. 2) f After pulling out the air filter unit, remove large foreign objects and dust from the air filter unit compartment and the air intake port of the projector body if there are any. (Fig. 3)

ENGLISH - 157


Cleaning the air filter unit

Remove the air filter unit beforehand with the previously described procedure of “Removing the air filter unit”.

Fig. 1 Fig. 2

1) Wash the air filter unit. (Fig. 1) i) Soak the air filter unit in cold or warm water and then lightly rinse it.

f Do not use cleaning tools such as brushes.

f When rinsing, hold the frame of the air filter unit without putting strong pressure on the filter unit.

ii) Rinse the air filter unit two to three times using fresh water each time.

f Insufficient rinsing may result in odors.

2) Dry the air filter unit. (Fig. 2) f Let the air filter unit naturally dry off in a well-ventilated place where there is little dust and is not exposed to direct sunlight.

f Do not dry using drying devices such as dryers.

f After the air filter is dried, proceed to “Attaching the air filter unit” (x page 158).

Attaching the air filter unit

Tabs on the projector body

Protrusion of the air filter unit

Groove on the projector body

Tabs on the projector body

Groove on the projector body

Protrusion of the air filter unit

1) Attach the air filter unit to the projector.

f The air filter unit has no difference between top and bottom, but is two-sided. Match the protrusion position of the air filter with the grooves on the projector body.

f Hook the air filter unit frame at the exhaust port side to the two tabs of the back side of the projector’s air filter unit compartment and perform Step 2) in “Removing the air filter unit” in the reverse order to attach.

f Confirm that the tabs of the air filter unit compartment of the projector body are hooked to the air filter unit frame.

2) Attach the air filter cover to the projector and use a Phillips screwdriver to tighten the air filter cover screw.

f Perform Step 2) in “Removing the air filter unit” (x page 157) in the reverse order.

Attention f After washing the air filter unit, dry it thoroughly before attaching it back to the projector. Attaching a wet unit will cause an electric shock or malfunction.

f Do not disassemble the air filter unit.

Note f Make sure that the air filter unit is properly attached before using the projector. If it is not properly attached, the projector will suck in dirt and dust causing a malfunction.

f If you use the projector without attaching the air filter unit, the filter indicator <FILTER> flashes in red and the message appears on the projection screen for approximately 30 seconds.

f Replace the air filter unit with the new optional Replacement Filter Unit (Model No.: ET-EMF320) if it is damaged or if the dirt does not come off even after washing.

f Air filter replacement is recommended after cleaning the unit two times.

f The dust-proof properties may be reduced after each cleaning.

158 - ENGLISH


Replacing the unit

Air filter unit

If dirt does not come off even after the unit is maintained, it is time for the unit to be replaced.

The Replacement Filter Unit (Model No.: ET-EMF320) is an optional accessory. To purchase the product, consult your dealer.

Replacing the air filter unit

Attention f Make sure to turn off the power before replacing the air filter unit.

f When attaching the unit, make sure that the projector is stable, and perform the replacement in a safe place where the unit will not be damaged even if you drop the air filter unit.

1) Remove the air filter unit.

f Refer to “Removing the air filter unit” (x page 157).

2) Attach the optional Replacement Filter Unit (Model No.: ET-EMF320) to the projector.

f The air filter unit has no difference between top and bottom, but is two-sided. Match the protrusion position of the air filter with the grooves on the projector body.

f Refer to “Attaching the air filter unit” (x page 158).

Attention f When switching on the projector, make sure that the air filter unit is attached. If it is not properly attached, the projector will suck in dirt and dust causing a malfunction.

f If you use the projector without attaching the air filter unit, the filter indicator <FILTER> flashes in red and the message appears on the projection screen for approximately 30 seconds.

Note f The replacement cycle of the air filter unit varies greatly depending on the usage environment.

Lamp unit

The lamp unit is a consumable component. Refer to “When to replace the lamp unit” (x page 160) for details about the replacement cycle.

When purchasing the optional Replacement lamp unit (Model No.: ET-LAD310A (1 pc), ET-LAD310AW (2 pcs)) or the Replacement lamp unit

(for portrait mode) (Model No.: ET-LAD320P (1 pc), ET-LAD320PW (2 pcs)), consult your dealer.

It is recommended that you request a qualified technician to replace the lamp unit. Consult your dealer.

Warning

Replace the lamp unit after the lamp has cooled (after waiting at least one hour).

The high temperature inside the cover will cause burns.

Checking the lamp unit to be replaced

1) Check the status of the lamp indicators <LAMP1>/<LAMP2>.

f The lamp unit corresponding to the lamp indicator that is lit in red is required to be replaced.

Notes on the replacement of the lamp unit f A Phillips screwdriver is necessary when replacing the lamp unit.

f Since the luminous lamp is made of glass, it may burst if dropped or hit with a hard object. Handle with care.

f Do not disassemble or modify the lamp unit.

f When replacing the lamp unit, be sure to hold it by the handle because its surface is pointed and its shape is protruded.

f The lamp contains mercury. When disposing of used lamp units, contact your local authorities or dealer for correct methods of disposal.

Attention f Panasonic takes no responsibility for any damage or malfunction of the product resulting from use of lamp units which are not manufactured by Panasonic. Use only specified lamp units.

f For the portrait setting, be sure to use the optional Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode).

f Do not use the Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode) and normal lamp unit together.

f Use the Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode) only when installing the projector in the portrait setting.

ENGLISH - 159


Note f The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.

When to replace the lamp unit

The lamp unit is a consumable component. Since its brightness gradually decreases over time, it is necessary to replace the lamp unit regularly. The estimated duration before replacement is 2 500 hours *1 , but the lamp may go off before 2 500 hours *1 has elapsed depending on individual lamp characteristics, usage conditions, and the installation environment. It is recommended that the Replacement lamp unit be prepared earlier.

If you continue to use the lamp unit after 2 500 hours *1 has elapsed, the lamp turns off automatically after approximately 10 minutes, as it will cause malfunction of the projector.

If the runtime of both of two lamp unit bulbs exceeds 2 500 hours *1 , the power will be switch off after approximately 10 minutes.

On-screen display

REPLACE LAMP

Lamp indicator

Over 2 300 hours *2

Over 2 500 hours *1

The message is displayed for 30 seconds. Pressing any button on the control panel or remote control within 30 seconds will clear the message.

The message remains displayed until you press any button.

The indicator lights in red even during the standby mode.

*1 For PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU. 3 500 hours for PT-DZ10KU.

*2 For PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU. 3 300 hours for PT-DZ10KU.

Note f To predict when to replace the lamp, check the lamp runtime displayed in [LAMP1] and [LAMP2] in [STATUS] (x page 119).

f 2 500 hours and 3 500 hours are estimated duration before replacement, and is not guaranteed.

f The estimated duration before replacing the Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode) is 500 hours regardless of the [LAMP POWER] setting. The on-screen message for replacing the lamp appears after 300 hours.

160 - ENGLISH


How to replace the lamp unit

Attention f When the projector is mounted on the ceiling, do not conduct work while your face is near the lamp unit.

f Do not remove or loosen the screws other than specified ones when replacing the lamp unit.

f Use same type of lamp unit for both lamps.

f When replacing the lamp unit, loosen the lamp unit cover fixing screw while putting your hand on.

Lamp unit cover

(i)

(ii)

Lamp unit cover fixing screw

Fig. 1

Lamp unit 2

Handles

Lamp unit 1

Grooves for the guide to attach the lamp unit

Guide to attach the lamp unit

Lamp unit fixing screws

Fan power connector

Fig. 2

Grooves for the guide to attach the lamp unit

Fig. 3

1) Set the <MAIN POWER> switch to <OFF> and disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.

f Wait at least one hour and check if the lamp unit has cooled down.

2) Remove the lamp unit cover. (Fig. 1) i) Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the lamp unit cover fixing screw (x1) counterclockwise until it turns freely, and open the lamp unit cover slowly in the direction of the arrow.

f Opening the lamp unit cover quickly may result in damage to the cover.

f If you loosen the lamp unit cover fixing screw with the projector installed upward in the vertical direction, the lamp unit cover may open on its weight and the lamp unit may be dropped off.

ii) Hold the lamp unit cover securely and slide it in the direction of the arrow, and then pull it out backward to remove.

f Fan and other components are attached to the lamp unit cover; handle the removed lamp unit cover with care.

3) Remove the lamp unit. (Fig. 2) f Use a Phillips screwdriver to turn the lamp unit fixing screws (x2) counterclockwise until they turn freely, and then remove the lamp unit.

f Hold the handles of the lamp unit and remove it in the horizontal direction.

f Do not remove the screws other than the lamp unit fixing screws.

4) Push in the new lamp unit while paying attention to the insertion position. (Fig. 3) f Push the guides to attach the lamp unit slowly into the projector body along the grooves for guide to attach the lamp unit.

f If the lamp unit is not installed properly, remove it and then push it in slowly. Pushing it in quickly or forcibly may break the connector.

ENGLISH - 161


5) Use a Phillips screwdriver to firmly tighten the lamp unit fixing screws (x2 each).

f Make sure to attach the lamp unit securely.

6) Attach the lamp unit cover.

i) Close the lamp unit cover in Step 2) in the reverse order.

f Attach the lamp unit cover so that the connector of the lamp unit cover is inserted to the fan power connector securely.

ii) Use a Phillips screwdriver to firmly tighten the lamp unit fixing screw (x1).

f Make sure to attach the lamp unit cover securely.

Note f When you replace the lamp unit with new one, the projector resets the runtime of the lamp unit automatically.

162 - ENGLISH

Chapter 5 Maintenance — Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting

Review the following points. For details, see the corresponding pages.

Menu screen does not appear.

Buttons on the control panel do not operate.

Image output from DVI-D of the computer does not appear.

Video from HDMI compatible device does not appear or it appears jumbled.

Problems

Power does not turn on.

No image appears.

Image is fuzzy.

Color is pale or grayish.

Remote control does not respond.

Image does not display correctly.

Image from a computer does not appear.

3D function is not working.

Points to be checked f Is the power plug firmly inserted into the outlet?

f Is the <MAIN POWER> switch set to <OFF>?

f Is the wall outlet supplying electricity?

f Have the circuit breakers tripped?

f Are the lamp indicator <LAMP1>/<LAMP2> or the temperature indicator <TEMP> lit or flashing?

f Is the lamp unit cover attached?

f Are connections to external devices correctly performed?

f Is the input selection setting correct?

f Is the [BRIGHTNESS] adjustment setting at a minimum?

f Is the external device that is connected to the projector working properly?

f Is the shutter function in use?

f If the power indicator <ON (G)/STANDBY (R)> is flashing in red, consult your dealer.

f Is the lens cover still attached to the lens?

f Is the lens focus set correctly?

f Is the projection distance appropriate?

f Is the lens dirty?

f Is the projector installed perpendicular to the screen?

f Is [COLOR] or [TINT] adjusted correctly?

f Is the external device connected to the projector adjusted correctly?

f Is the RGB cable damaged?

f Are the batteries depleted?

f Is the polarity of the batteries set correctly?

f Are there any obstructions between the remote control and the remote control signal receiver of the projector?

f Is the remote control being used beyond its effective operation range?

f Are other forms of light, such as fluorescent light, affecting the projection?

f Is the [REMOTE CONTROL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to

[DISABLE]?

f Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control?

f Is the ID number setting operation correct?

f Is the on-screen display function turned off (hidden)?

f Is the [CONTROL PANEL] setting in [CONTROL DEVICE SETUP] set to

[DISABLE]?

f Is the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal used for contact control?

f Is the [SYSTEM SELECTOR] selection set correctly?

f Is there a problem with the video tape or other image sources?

f Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input?

f Is the cable too long? (Use D-Sub cables that are 10 m (32'10") or shorter.) f Is the external video output of the laptop computer set correctly? (Ex.: The external output settings may be switched by pressing the “Fn” + “F3” or “Fn” + “F10” simultaneously. Since the method varies depending on the computer type, refer to the user manual provided with your computer.) f Is the [DVI-D IN] setting [EDID3]/[EDID2:PC]?

f The graphics accelerator driver of the computer may need to be updated to the latest version.

f The computer may need to be restarted after performing the [DVI-D IN] setting.

f Is the HDMI cable connected securely?

f Turn the power of the projector and the external device on and off.

f Is a signal which is not compatible with the projector being input?

f Is the [3D INPUT FORMAT] setting of [3D SETTINGS] correct?

f Check the 3D eyewear settings.

f Is a signal which is supported by the projector being input?

―

100

―

100

48

―

175

92

―

177

161

48

62

72

―

61

―

53

56

32

18

―

72

48

―

―

28

Page

―

55

―

―

155

24

25

25

132

173

28

102

132

173

77

―

175

―

ENGLISH - 163

Problems

Left and right images are reversed (not showing properly).

Image in the 3D eyewear flickers.

3D eyewear is not functioning.

Chapter 5 Maintenance — Troubleshooting

Points to be checked f Are the devices synchronized? Check the 3D eyewear settings.

f Change the [LEFT/RIGHT SWAP] setting of [3D SETTINGS].

f Are you within the reception range?

f Are batteries of the 3D eyewear drained? If you use the rechargeable 3D eyewear, charge it. If you use the battery-powered 3D eyewear, replace the battery.

f Is the [3D SETTINGS] setting correct?

Attention f If problems persist even after checking the preceding points, consult your dealer.

Page

―

93

―

―

91

164 - ENGLISH

Chapter 6 Appendix

This chapter describes specifications and after-sales service for the projector.

ENGLISH - 165

Chapter 6 Appendix — Technical information

Technical information

PJLink protocol

The network function of this projector supports the PJLink class 1, and the PJLink protocol can be used to perform projector setting and projector status query operations from a computer.

Control commands

The following table lists the PJLink protocol commands that can be used to control the projector.

f x characters in tables are non-specific characters.

Command

POWR

POWR?

INPT

INPT?

AVMT

AVMT?

ERST?

LAMP?

INST?

NAME?

INF1?

INF2?

INF0?

CLSS?

Control details

Power supply control

Power supply status query

Input selection

Input selection query

Shutter control

Shutter status query

Error status query

Lamp status query

Input selection list query

Projector name query

34

30

31

31

32

33

2

3

11

12

21

0

1

Parameter / return string

0

1 xxxxxx xxxxxxxxxxxx

11 12 21 31 32 33 34

11 12 21 31 32

11 12 21 31 32 33 xxxxx

Manufacturer name query

Panasonic

Model name query

DZ13K

DS12K

DW11K

DZ10K

Other information queries xxxxx

Class information query 1

Remark

Standby

Power on

Standby

Power on

Preparing for switching off the projector

Warm-up

RGB1

RGB2

VIDEO

DVI-D

HDMI

SDI1 (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU), SDI (only for PT-DZ10KU)

SDI2 (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

Shutter function off (shutter open)

Shutter function on (shutter closed)

1st byte

2nd byte

Indicates fan errors, and returns

0 - 2.

Indicates lamp errors, and returns

0 - 2.

3rd byte

4th byte

Indicates temperature errors, and returns 0 - 2.

Indicates cover open errors, and returns 0 or 2.

f f f

0 = No error is detected

1 = Warning

2 = Error

5th byte

Indicates filter errors, and returns

0 - 2.

6th byte

Indicates other errors, and returns

0 - 2.

1st digits (1 - 5 digits): Lamp 1 runtime

2nd digit: 0 = Lamp 1 off, 1 = Lamp 1 on

3rd digits (1 - 5 digits): Lamp 2 runtime

4th digit: 0 = Lamp 2 off, 1 = Lamp 2 on

Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU

Only for PT-DW11KU

Only for PT-DZ10KU

Returns the name set in [PROJECTOR NAME] of [NETWORK

SETUP].

Returns manufacturer name.

Returns model name.

Returns information such as version number.

Returns class for PJLink.

166 - ENGLISH


PJLink security authentication

The password used for PJLink is the same as that of the password set for web control.

When using the projector without security authentication, do not set a password for web control.

f For specifications related to PJLink, refer to the website of Japan Business Machine and Information System Industries Association.

URL http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/

Control commands via LAN

When web control administrator rights password is set (Protect mode)

Connecting

1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request for a connection to the projector.

f You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.

IP address

Port number

Obtain from the main menu → [NETWORK] → [NETWORK STATUS]

Obtain from the main menu → [NETWORK] → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT]

2) Check the response from the projector.

Command example

Data length

Data section

“NTCONTROL”

(ASCII string)

9 bytes

Blank

‘ ’

0x20

1 byte

Mode

‘1’

0x31

1 byte

Blank

‘ ’

0x20

1 byte

Random number section

“zzzzzzzz”

(ASCII code hex number)

8 bytes f Mode: 1 = Protect mode

3) Generate a 32-byte hash value from the following data using MD5 algorithm.

f “xxxxxx:yyyyy:zzzzzzzz” xxxxxx yyyyy zzzzzzzz

Administrator rights user name for the web control (default user name is “admin1”)

Password of above administrator rights user (default password is “panasonic”)

8-byte random number obtained in Step 2)

Termination symbol

(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

Command transmission method

Transmit using the following command formats.

r

Transmitted data

Command example

Data length

Header

Hash value

(Refer to “Connecting” above)

32 bytes

‘0’

0x30

1 byte r

Received data

Header

Command example

Data length

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

Data section

Control command

(ASCII string)

Undefined length

Data section

Control command

(ASCII string)

Undefined length


(CR)

0x0d

1 byte


(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

ENGLISH - 167

Chapter 6 Appendix — Technical information r

Error response

Message

String

“ERR1”

“ERR2”

“ERR3”

“ERR4”

“ERR5”

“ERRA”

4 bytes

Undefined control command

Out of parameter range

Busy state or no-acceptable period

Timeout or no-acceptable period

Wrong data length

Password mismatch

Details

― Data length

When web control administrator rights password is not set (Non-protect mode)


(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

Connecting

1) Obtain the IP address and port number (Initial set value = 1024) of the projector and request for a connection to the projector.

f You can obtain both the IP address and the port number from the menu screen of the projector.

IP address

Port number

Obtain from the main menu → [NETWORK] → [NETWORK STATUS]

Obtain from the main menu → [NETWORK] → [NETWORK CONTROL] → [COMMAND PORT]

2) Check the response from the projector.

Command example

Data length

Data section

“NTCONTROL”

(ASCII string)

9 bytes f Mode: 0 = Non-protect mode

Blank

‘ ’

0x20

1 byte

Mode

‘0’

0x30

1 byte


(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

Command transmission method

Transmit using the following command formats.

r

Transmitted data

Command example

Data length

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

Header

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

Data section

Control command

(ASCII string)

Undefined length


(CR)

0x0d

1 byte r

Received data

Command example

Data length

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

Header

‘0’

0x30

1 byte

Data section

Control command

(ASCII string)

Undefined length


(CR)

0x0d

1 byte

168 - ENGLISH


Error response

Message

String

“ERR1”

“ERR2”

“ERR3”

“ERR4”

“ERR5”

“ERRA”

4 bytes

Undefined control command

Out of parameter range

Busy state or no-acceptable period

Timeout or no-acceptable period

Wrong data length

Password mismatch

Details

―


(CR)

0x0d

Data length 1 byte

<SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal

The <SERIAL IN>/<SERIAL OUT> terminal of the projector conforms with RS-232C so that the projector can be connected to and controlled from a computer.

Connection

Single projector

Projector connecting terminals

D-Sub 9p (female) D-Sub 9p (male)

Computer

D-Sub 9p (male)

Communication cable (straight)

Multiple projectors

Connecting terminals on projector 1


Computer

Connecting terminals on projector 2


D-Sub 9p (male) D-Sub 9p (female)

Communication cable Communication cable

Note f The destination of [RS-232C] (x page 118) must be set according to the connection method.

Pin assignments and signal names

D-Sub 9p (male)

D-Sub 9-pin (female)

Outside view

(5)

(9)

(1)

(6)

Pin No.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Signal name

―

TXD

RXD

―

GND

―

CTS

RTS

―

Details

NC

Transmitted data

Received data

NC

Earth

NC

Connected internally

NC

ENGLISH - 169


D-Sub 9-pin (male)

Outside view

(1) (5)

(6) (9)

Pin No.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Communication conditions (Factory default)

Signal level

Sync. method

Baud rate

Parity

Character length

Stop bit

X parameter

S parameter

RS-232C-compliant

Asynchronous

9 600 bps

None

8 bits

1 bit

None

None

Signal name

―

RXD

TXD

―

GND

―

RTS

CTS

―

Details

NC

Received data

Transmitted data

NC

Earth

NC

Connected internally

NC

Basic format

Transmission from the computer starts with STX, then the ID, command, parameter, and ETX are sent in this order. Add parameters according to the details of control.

ID designate

ZZ, 01 to 06

(2 bytes)

End (1 byte)

Parameter (undefined length)

Colon (1 byte)

3 command characters (3 bytes)

Semi-colon (1 byte)

2 ID characters (2 bytes)

Start (1 byte)

Basic format (has subcommands)

Same as the basic format

Sub command (5 bytes) Parameter (6 bytes) *1

Symbol “+” or “–” (1 byte) and setting or adjustment value (5 bytes)

Operation (1 byte) *1

“=” (Set the value specified using parameter)

*1 When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, an operation (E) and parameter are not necessary.

170 - ENGLISH


Attention f If a command is transmitted after the lamp starts illuminating, there may be a delay in response or the command may not be executed. Try sending or receiving any command after 60 seconds.

f When transmitting multiple commands, be sure to wait until 0.5 seconds has elapsed after receiving the response from the projector before sending the next command. When transmitting a command which does not need a parameter, a colon (:) is not necessary.

Note f If a command cannot be executed, the “ER401” response is sent from the projector to the computer.

f If an invalid parameter is sent, the “ER402” response is sent from the projector to the computer.

f ID transmission in RS-232C supports ZZ (ALL) and 01 to 64, as well as 0A to 0Z groups.

f If a command is sent with a specified ID, a response will be sent to the computer only in the following cases.

g It matches the projector ID g ID setting is set to ALL and [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] is [ON] g ID setting is set to GROUP and [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] is [ON] f STX and ETX are character codes. STX shown in hexadecimal is 02, and ETX shown in hexadecimal is 03.

When multiple projectors are controlled

When multiple projectors are all controlled

When controlling multiple projectors together via RS-232C, perform the following settings.

1) Set a different ID for each projector.

2) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector.

3) Set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).

When multiple projectors are all controlled by group unit

When controlling multiple projectors by group unit via RS-232C, perform the following settings.

1) Set a different ID for each projector.

2) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [ON] in only one projector.

3) Set [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] to [OFF] for all other projectors set in Step 2).

Note f There will be no response if two or more projectors have [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] set to [ON].

f There will be no response if two or more projectors of the same group have [RESPONSE(ID GROUP)] set to [ON].

f When setting multiple groups, set [RESPONSE(ID ALL)] to [ON] in only one projector in each group.

Cable specification

When connected to a computer

Projector

(<SERIAL IN> terminal)

1 NC NC 1

2 2

3 3

4 NC NC 4

5 5

6 NC NC 6

7 7

8 8

9 NC NC 9

Computer

(DTE specifications)

When multiple projectors are connected

Projector 1

(<SERIAL OUT> terminal)

1 NC NC 1

2 2

3 3

4 NC NC 4

5 5

6 NC NC 6

7 7

8 8

9 NC NC 9

Projector 2

(<SERIAL IN> terminal)

ENGLISH - 171


Control command

The following table lists the commands that can be used to control the projector using a computer.

r

Projector control command

Command

PON

POF

QPW

IIS

QSL

LPM

OLP

Q$L

OSH

QSH

VSE

QSE

OPP

QPP

Details

Power on

Power standby

Power query

Switching the input signal

Query for lamp selection

Lamp selection

0

1

2

3

2

3

HD1

SD1

SD2

0

1

000

001

VID

RG1

RG2

DVI

Parameter/response string

―

Lamp power

Lamp cumulative runtime query

Shutter

Shutter status query

Aspect ratio switch

Aspect ratio settings query

P IN P execute

P IN P setting query

0

1

2

1

8

0

1

2

3

0

1

2

3

2

5

6

9

10

0

1

0

1

Remark (parameter)

To check if the power is on, use the “Power query” command.

STANDBY

Power on

VIDEO

RGB1

RGB2

DVI-D

HDMI

SDI1 (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DZ10KU)

SDI2 (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

DUAL

SINGLE

LAMP1

LAMP2

DUAL

SINGLE *1

LAMP1

LAMP2

HIGH (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU)

NORMAL (only for PT-DZ10KU)

ECO

MIDDLE (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU)

LAMP1

LAMP2

OFF

USER1

USER2

USER3

OFF

USER1

USER2

USER3

Response is 0000 to 4000

OPEN

CLOSE

DEFAULT/VID AUTO

4:3

16:9

THROUGH

HV FIT

H FIT

V FIT

OCS

QSB

Sub memory switch

Sub memory status query

01 - 96 Sub memory number

*1 Use Lamp 1 or Lamp 2 whichever has a shorter runtime.

r

Projector control command (with sub command)

Command

VXX

Sub command

RYCI1

Details

RGB1 input setting

Remark

+00000 = RGB/YP

B

P

R

, +00001 = Y/C

172 - ENGLISH


Lens control command

Command

VXX

VXX

VXX

VXX

Sub command

LNSI2

LNSI3

LNSI4

LNSI5

Details

Lens H shift

Lens V shift

Lens focus

Lens zoom

Remark

+00000 = Fine adjustment 1+, +00001 = Fine adjustment 1-, +00100

= Fine adjustment 2+, +00101 = Fine adjustment 2-, +00200 = Coarse adjustment+, +00201 = Coarse adjustment-

<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal

It is possible to control the projector remotely (by external contact) from a control panel located away from the projector where remote control signals cannot reach.

Use the <REMOTE 2 IN> terminal on the connecting terminals of the projector to connect to the control panel.

Remote control Contact control

Remote control/contact control

Standby Lit

Lamp

RGB1

RGB2

VIDEO

HDMI

Installation locations in meeting rooms, etc.

Pin assignments and signal names

DVI-D

Remote control board in another location

D-Sub 9-pin

Outside view

(5)

(9)

(1)

(6)

Pin No.

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(9)

Signal name

GND

POWER

RGB1

RGB2

VIDEO

HDMI

DVI-D

SHUTTER

RST/SET

Open (H)

―

OFF

Other

Other

Other

Other

Other

OFF

Controlled by remote control

Short (L)

GND

ON

RGB1

RGB2

VIDEO

HDMI

DVI-D

ON

Controlled by external contact

Attention f When controlling, make sure to short-circuit pins (1) and (9).

f When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control cannot be used.

The power on <b> button, the power standby <v> button, the <SHUTTER> button, and the RS-232C commands and network functions corresponding to these functions cannot be used either.

f When pins (1) and (9) are short-circuited, if any pins from (3) to (7) are short-circuited with pin (1), the following buttons on the control panel and the remote control cannot be used.

The power on <b> button, the power standby <v> button, <RGB1> button, <RGB2> button, <DVI-D> button, <VIDEO> button, <HDMI> button, <SDI 1/2> button, <SHUTTER> button, and the RS-232C commands and network functions corresponding to these functions cannot be used either.

Note f For pin (2) to pin (8) settings, you can make changes if you set [REMOTE2 MODE] to [USER]. (x page 120)

ENGLISH - 173


Two-window display combination list

RGB1

Main window

RGB

Movie *3

RGB2

Y/C input

VIDEO input

RGB

Movie *3

DVI-D

HDMI

SDI1 *4 /SDI *6

SDI2 *5

Dual link HD-SDI *7

RGB *2

Movie *1

RGB *2

Movie *1 l l l l l

―

RGB

―

―

― l l l l a l a a a

―

RGB1

Movie *3

―

―

― l a a l a l a a a a

Y/C input

―

―

― l a

― l

Sub window

RGB l l

RGB2

Movie *3 l a l

―

― l l a

―

― a l l l l l l

― a l a a a

― a

― l a l

VIDEO input l a

― l a a a a

RGB1

Main window

RGB

Movie *3

Y/C input

RGB2

DVI-D

RGB

Movie *3

VIDEO input

RGB *2

Movie *1

HDMI

RGB *2

Movie *1

SDI1 *4 /SDI *6

SDI2 *5

Dual link HD-SDI *7 l l

―

― l l l

―

―

RGB *2 l

DVI-D

Movie *1 l l a l l a l a a

―

― l a a

―

― l l l l

―

―

― l

―

RGB *2 l

Sub window

HDMI

Movie *1 l l l l a a l a a l a

―

―

― a

―

SDI1 *4 a a l a

―

―

― a

― l a a l

SDI2 *5 a a

―

― l a a

―

― l a a l l : P IN P (picture in picture) combination is possible a : P IN P (picture in picture) combination is possible through the same frequency

-: P IN P (picture in picture) combination is not possible

*1 Only supports 480p, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sF, 1080/24p, 1080/25p, 1080/30p, 1080/50p, and 1080/60p

*2 VGA (640 x 480) - WUXGA (1 920 x 1 200)

Non-interlace signal, dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz (The WUXGA signal is only compatible with VESA CVT RB (Reduced Blanking) signals.)

*3 480i, 480p, 576i, 576p, 720/60p, 720/50p, 1080/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/24sF, 1080/24p, 1080/25p, 1080/30p, 1080/50p, 1080/60p

*4 SDI1 (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

*5 SDI2 (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

*6 SDI (only for PT-DZ10KU)

*7 Dual link HD-SDI (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

Control device password

To initialize your password, consult your distributor.

Dual link

HD-SDI *7

―

― a

―

― a

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

174 - ENGLISH


Upgrade Kit


If the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20) is applied, the following functions are extended.

Function

Adjustment range of

[VERTICAL KEYSTONE]


[HORIZONTAL KEYSTONE]


[CURVED]

[CUSTOM MASKING]

[PC CORRECTION] of

[UNIFORMITY]

Standard status

Maximum of ±40° *1


Vertical arc, Maximum ±50° *1

Horizontal arc, Maximum ±50° *1

Cannot be used.

Cannot be used.

When the Upgrade Kit is applied



Vertical arc, Maximum ±100° *1

Horizontal arc, Maximum ±100° *1

The image can be masked in optional form.

The brightness and unevenness of color of the entire screen can be corrected.

*1 The adjustment range of the menu. Refer to “[GEOMETRY] projection range” (x page 33) for the possible projection range.

For details, refer to the Operating Instructions included in the CD-ROM of the optional Upgrade Kit (Model No.: ET-UK20).

List of compatible signals

The following table specifies the video signals compatible with the projector.

f Symbols that indicate formats are as follows.

g V: VIDEO, Y/C g R: RGB g Y: YC

B

C

R

/YP

B g D: DVI-D

P

R g H: HDMI g S: SDI

Mode

NTSC/NTSC4.43/

PAL-M/PAL60

PAL/PAL-N/SECAM

525i (480i)

625i (576i)

525i (480i)

625i (576i)

525p (480p)

625p (576p)

750 (720)/60p

750 (720)/50p

1125 (1080)/60i *4

1125 (1080)/50i

1125 (1080)/24p

1125 (1080)/24sF

1125 (1080)/25p

1125 (1080)/30p

1125 (1080)/60p

1125 (1080)/50p

2K/24p

2K/24sF

VESA400

VGA480

Resolution

(Dots)

Scanning freq.

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz)

15.7

59.9

720 x 480i

720 x 576i

720 x 480i

15.6

15.7

720 x 576i 15.6

720 (1440) x 480i *3 15.7

720 (1440) x 576i *3 15.6

720 x 483 31.5

720 x 576

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 920 x 1 080i

31.3

45.0

37.5

33.8

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

28.1

27.0

27.0

28.1

33.8

67.5

56.3

2 048 x 1 080

2 048 x 1 080

640 x 400

640 x 400

640 x 480

640 x 480

640 x 480

640 x 480

640 x 480

27.0

27.0

31.5

37.9

31.5

35.0

37.9

37.5

43.3

50.0

59.9

50.0

59.9

50.0

59.9

50.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

24.0

48.0

25.0

30.0

60.0

50.0

24.0

24.0

70.1

85.1

59.9

66.7

72.8

75.0

85.0

Dot clock freq.

(MHz)

―

―

13.5

13.5

27.0

27.0

27.0

27.0

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

148.5

148.5

74.3

74.3

25.2

31.5

25.2

30.2

31.5

31.5

36.0

Format

V

V

R/Y/S *2

R/Y/S *2

D/H

D/H

R/Y/D/H

R/Y/D/H

R/Y/D/H/S *2

R/Y/D/H/S *2

R/Y/D/H/S

R/Y/D/H/S

R/Y/D/H/S

R/Y/D/H/S

R/Y/D/H/S

R/Y/D/H/S

R/Y/D/H/S *2*5

R/Y/D/H/S *2*5

S *6

S *6

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

― l

― l l

―

RGB2

―

Plug and play *1

DVI-D

EDID1 EDID2 EDID3

― ― ―

HDMI

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

― l

― l l

― l l l l l

―

―

―

― l

―

―

―

― l

― l

― l

―

―

―

―

― l l l l l l

―

―

―

―

― l l l

―

―

―

― l

― l l

― l

― l l

― l l l l

―

―

―

―

― l l l

―

―

―

― l

― l l

―

―

― l l

―

ENGLISH - 175

Mode

SVGA

MAC16

XGA

MXGA

MAC21

1280 x 720

1280 x 768

1280 x 800

MSXGA

SXGA

1366 x 768

SXGA+

WXGA+

UXGA60

WSXGA+


Scanning freq.

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz)

35.2

37.9

56.3

60.3

48.1

46.9

53.7

49.7

39.6

48.4

56.5

76.7

68.7

37.1

44.8

76.3

92.6

39.6

47.8

60.0

65.5

68.7

81.4

98.8

53.7

64.0

67.5

47.4

60.3

68.6

41.3

49.7

49.3

62.8

71.6

60.0

52.4

72.2

75.0

85.1

74.6

50.0

60.0

70.1

85.0

75.1

49.8

59.9

100.0

120.0

49.9

59.9

75.0

81.6

85.0

100.0

120.0

60.0

70.0

74.9

60.0

74.9

84.8

50.0

59.8

59.9

74.9

84.9

60.0

50.0

65.3

78.8

82.2

55.9

46.3

75.0

65.3

54.1

64.0

72.3

78.2

80.0

91.1

47.7

39.6

54.1

64.0

65.2

60.0

72.0

75.0

59.9

49.9

60.0

60.0

50.0

60.0

66.3

72.0

75.0

85.0

59.8

49.9

50.0

60.0

60.0

Format

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

R/D/H

Dot clock freq.

(MHz)

121.8

149.3

155.9

106.5

86.8

162.0

146.3

119.5

108.0

125.0

135.1

135.0

157.5

85.5

69.0

99.9

108.0

122.6

36.0

40.0

50.0

49.5

56.3

57.3

51.9

65.0

75.0

121.5

100.0

60.5

74.5

131.8

161.6

65.3

79.5

78.8

86.0

94.5

113.3

139.1

81.6

94.2

108.0

68.3

102.3

117.5

68.0

83.5

71.0

106.5

122.5

108.0

88.0

Resolution

(Dots)

1 280 x 1 024

1 280 x 1 024

1 280 x 1 024

1 280 x 1 024

1 280 x 1 024

1 366 x 768

1 366 x 768

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 440 x 900

1 440 x 900

1 600 x 1 200

1 680 x 1 050

1 680 x 1 050

800 x 600

800 x 600

800 x 600

800 x 600

800 x 600

832 x 624

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 152 x 864

1 152 x 864

1 152 x 864

1 152 x 864

1 152 x 870

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 768

1 280 x 768

1 280 x 768 *7

1 280 x 768

1 280 x 768

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 800 *7

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 960

1 280 x 1 024

RGB2

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―


DVI-D


― l l

― l l l l

― l

― l l l

―

―

― l

―

―

―

― l l l

― l

― l l l

―

―

― l

―

―

―

― l

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

― l

―

― l

― l

―

―

― l

―

―

―

―

― l

―

―

*8 l

―

― l

― l

―

―

― l l

*8

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

HDMI l l l l

― l

― l l l

― l *8 l

―

―

―

―

―

― l

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

― l

―

―

― l l

―

―

―

―

― l

―

―

―

―

― l l l l

― l

― l l l

― l *8 l

―

―

―

―

―

― l

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

― l

―

―

― l l

―

―

―

―

― l

―

―

―

―

―

176 - ENGLISH


Mode

1920 x 1080

WUXGA

Resolution

(Dots)

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080 *7

1 920 x 1 080 *9

1 920 x 1 200

1 920 x 1 200 *7

1 920 x 1 200 *9

Scanning freq.

Horizontal

(kHz)

Vertical

(Hz)

55.6

66.6

67.2

61.8

74.0

74.6

49.9

59.9

60.0

49.9

60.0

59.9

Dot clock freq.

(MHz)

141.5

138.5

173.0

158.3

154.0

193.3

Format

R/D/H

R/D/H

R

R/D/H

R/D/H

R

―

―

―

― l

―

RGB2


DVI-D


― ― ―

―

―

―

―

―

―

― l

―

―

― l *10

HDMI

―

―

―

― l *10

― ― ― ―

*1 Signals with l in the Plug and play columns are signals described in EDID (extended display identification data) of the projector. A signal, which has no l in the Plug and play columns but has an entry in the Format column, can be input. For signals without l in the Plug and play columns, resolution may not be selected in the computer even though the projector supports them.

*2 For single link connections only

*3 Pixel-Repetition signal (dot clock frequency 27.0 MHz) only

*4 When a 1125 (1035)/60i signal was input, it is displayed as a 1125 (1080)/60i signal.

*5 Only for SDI1

*6 For dual link connections only

*7 VESA CVT-RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant

*8 Only for PT-DW11KU

*9 Samples the pixels in the image processing circuit and projects the image.

*10 Only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DZ10KU

Note f There are 1 920 x 1 080 display dots for PT-DZ13KU and PT-DZ10KU, 1 400 x 1 050 for PT-DS12KU, and 1 366 x 768 for PT-DW11KU. A signal with a different resolution is converted to the number of display dots.

f The “i” at the end of the resolution indicates an interlaced signal.

f When interlaced signals are connected, flickering may occur on the projected image.

List of 3D compatible signals


The following table specifies the 3D compatible video signals that the projector can project.

Items that are applicable to 1 to 10 in the table are as follows.

1 Frame packing system

2 Side by side system

3 Top and bottom system

4 Line by line system

5 Frame sequential system

6 3G-SDI Level B simultaneous system

7 HDMI & DVI-D

8 RGB1 & RGB2

9 SDI1 & SDI2 (only for PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

10 Simultaneous system

3D compatible signal

750 (720)/60p

750 (720)/50p

1080/60i

1080/50i

1080/24p

1080/24sF

1080/25p

1080/30p

1080/60p

1080/50p

VGA480

SVGA

XGA

Resolution

(Dots)

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

640 x 480

800 x 600

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

28.1

33.8

67.5

56.3

31.5

37.9

39.6

48.4

81.4

98.8

Scanning freq.

Horizontal

(kHz)

45.0

Vertical

(Hz)

60.0

37.5

33.8

50.0

60.0

28.1

27.0

27.0

50.0

24.0

48.0

25.0

30.0

60.0

50.0

59.9

60.3

50.0

60.0

100.0

120.0

1

74.3

74.3

148.5

148.5

25.2

40.0

51.9

65.0

113.3

139.1

Dot clock freq.

(MHz)

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

l l l l l

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

HDMI

2 *1 l l l l l

―

―

― l l

―

―

―

―

―

―

2 *1 l l l l

―

― l l l l l l l l l l

3 l l

―

― l

―

―

― l l

―

―

―

―

―

―

5

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

― l l

3

DVI-D

4 l l

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

― l l l l l l l l l l

―

―

―

―

―

―

ENGLISH - 177


MXGA

1280 x 720

1280 x 768

1280 x 800

MSXGA

SXGA

1366 x 768

SXGA+

WXGA+

UXGA60

WSXGA+

1920 x 1080

WUXGA

Resolution

(Dots)

1 152 x 864

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 768

1 280 x 768

1 280 x 768 *2

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 800 *2

1 280 x 960

1 280 x 1 024

1 280 x 1 024

1 366 x 768

1 366 x 768

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 440 x 900

1 440 x 900

1 600 x 1 200

1 680 x 1 050

1 680 x 1 050

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080 *2

1 920 x 1 200

1 920 x 1 200 *2

*1 Supports half.

*2 VESA CVT RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant

46.3

75.0

65.3

54.1

55.6

66.6

61.8

74.0

54.1

64.0

65.2

65.3

55.9

Scanning freq.

Horizontal

(kHz)

53.7

Vertical

(Hz)

60.0

37.1

44.8

76.3

92.6

49.8

59.9

100.0

120.0

39.6

47.8

47.4

41.3

49.7

49.3

60.0

52.4

64.0

47.7

39.6

59.9

60.0

50.0

60.0

59.8

49.9

49.9

59.9

60.0

50.0

59.8

49.9

60.0

60.0

50.0

49.9

59.9

49.9

60.0

50.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

59.9


HDMI

2 *1

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

68.3

68.0

83.5

71.0

108.0

88.0

108.0

85.5

69.0

99.9

108.0

122.6

121.8

106.5

86.8

162.0

146.3

119.5

141.5

138.5

158.3

154.0

Dot clock freq.

(MHz)

81.6

60.5

74.5

131.8

161.6

65.3

79.5

1

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

3

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

3

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

DVI-D

4

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

― l

5 l

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

―

― l

2 *1 l l l l l l l l l l

―

― l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l

178 - ENGLISH


750 (720)/60p

750 (720)/50p

1080/60i

1080/50i

1080/24p

1080/24sF

1080/25p

1080/30p

1080/60p

1080/50p

VGA480

SVGA

XGA

MXGA

1280 x 720

1280 x 768

1280 x 800

MSXGA

SXGA

1366 x 768

SXGA+

WXGA+

UXGA60

WSXGA+

1920 x 1080

WUXGA

*1 Supports half.

*2 VESA CVT RB (Reduced Blanking)-compliant

*3 Only supports SDI1

60.0

52.4

64.0

47.7

39.6

54.1

64.0

65.2

65.3

55.9

46.3

75.0

65.3

54.1

55.6

66.6

61.8

74.0

53.7

37.1

44.8

76.3

92.6

39.6

47.8

47.4

41.3

49.7

49.3

31.5

37.9

39.6

48.4

81.4

98.8

Scanning freq.

Horizontal

(kHz)

45.0

Vertical

(Hz)

60.0

37.5

33.8

28.1

27.0

50.0

60.0

50.0

24.0

27.0

28.1

33.8

67.5

56.3

48.0

25.0

30.0

60.0

50.0

59.9

60.3

50.0

60.0

100.0

120.0

60.0

49.8

59.9

100.0

120.0

49.9

59.9

60.0

50.0

59.8

59.9

60.0

50.0

60.0

59.8

49.9

50.0

60.0

60.0

60.0

59.9

49.9

60.0

60.0

50.0

49.9

59.9

49.9

60.0

Resolution

(Dots)

1 152 x 864

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 768

1 280 x 768

1 280 x 768 *2

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 800

1 280 x 800 *2

1 280 x 960

1 280 x 1 024

1 280 x 1 024

1 366 x 768

1 366 x 768

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 400 x 1 050

1 440 x 900

1 440 x 900

1 600 x 1 200

1 680 x 1 050

1 680 x 1 050

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080 *2

1 920 x 1 200

1 920 x 1 200 *2

1 280 x 720

1 280 x 720

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080i

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

1 920 x 1 080

640 x 480

800 x 600

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

1 024 x 768

108.0

88.0

108.0

85.5

69.0

99.9

108.0

122.6

121.8

106.5

86.8

162.0

146.3

119.5

141.5

138.5

158.3

154.0

81.6

60.5

74.5

131.8

161.6

65.3

79.5

68.3

68.0

83.5

71.0

Dot clock freq.

(MHz)

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

74.3

148.5

148.5

25.2

40.0

51.9

65.0

113.3

139.1


RGB1/RGB2 SDI1/SDI2 7 8 9

2 *1 3 4 5 2 *1 3 4 6 *3 10 10 10 l l l

― l l l l l l l l l l ― l l l l l l l l l ― ― l l ― l l l l l l ― ― l l ― l l l l l l ― ― l l ― l l l l l l ― ― l l ― l l l l l l ― ― l l ― l l l l l l ― ― l l ― l l l l l l ― ― l

*3 l *3

― ― l l ― l l ― ― l *3 l *3 ― ― l l ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l

― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―

― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ―

― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―

― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ―

― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l

― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l l ― l

― ― ― ― ― ― ― l l

― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l l ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l l ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l ― ― ― ― ― ― ― l l ― l

― l

― ― ― ― ― l l

―

ENGLISH - 179

Chapter 6 Appendix — Specifications

Specifications

The specifications of the projector are as follows.

Power supply

Power consumption

AC 120 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz

PT-DZ13KU

PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU

1 000 W (9.3 A)

980 W (9.1 A)

PT-DZ10KU 925 W (9 A)

0.2 W when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [ECO]

6 W when [STANDBY MODE] is set to [NORMAL]

DLP chip

Size


PT-DS12KU

PT-DW11KU

Display system 3-unit DLP chips, DLP type

Number of pixels


PT-DS12KU

PT-DW11KU

Optional

24.4 mm (0.96") (aspect ratio 16:10)

24.1 mm (0.95") (aspect ratio 4:3)

21.6 mm (0.85") (aspect ratio 16:9)

2 304 000 pixels (1 920 x 1 200 dots)

1 470 000 pixels (1 400 x 1 050 dots)

1 049 088 pixels (1 366 x 768 dots)

Lens

Luminous lamp

Light output *1

PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU,

PT-DW11KU

PT-DZ10KU

380 W UHM lamp x 2

355 W UHM lamp x 2

PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU

PT-DW11KU

12 000 lm (ANSI)

11 000 lm (ANSI)

PT-DZ10KU 10 600 lm (ANSI)

10 000:1 (when [DYNAMIC IRIS] is set to [3]) Contrast ratio *1

Color system


Screen aspect ratio

7 standards (NTSC/NTSC4.43/PAL/PAL-N/PAL-M/SECAM/PAL60)

1.78 m (70") to 25.40 m (1 000")


PT-DS12KU

PT-DW11KU

16:10

4:3

16:9

[FRONT/CEILING], [FRONT/FLOOR], [REAR/CEILING], [REAR/FLOOR] Projection method

Power cable length

Outer case

Dimensions

Width

Height

Depth

Weight

Noise level

Operating environment

Remote control

*1

3.0 m (118-1/8")

Molded plastic

530 mm (20-7/8")

200 mm (7-7/8") (with legs at shortest position)

548.5 mm (21-19/32") (excluding the lens)

Approx. 24.0 k] (52.9 lbs.) *2

PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU,

PT-DW11KU

PT-DZ10KU

45 dB

43 dB

Operating environment temperature *3

Operating environment humidity

Power supply

0 °C (32 °F) to 45 °C (113 °F)

10 % to 80 % (no condensation)

DC 3 V (AA/R6 battery x 2)

Operating range Within approx. 30 m (98'5") (when operated directly in front of signal receiver)

Weight 134 ] (4.7 ozs.) (including batteries)

Dimensions Width: 51 mm (2"), Height: 176 mm (6-15/16"), Depth: 28 mm (1-3/32")

*1 Measurement, measuring conditions and method of notation all comply with ISO21118 international standards.

*2 Average value. Weight varies for each product.

*3 When using the projector at high altitudes (1 400 m (4 593') or higher – lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level), the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C (104 °F).

If you use the Smoke cut filter, the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 35 °C (95 °F). However, it cannot be used at high altitudes.

If you use the Replacement lamp unit (for portrait mode), the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 40 °C

(104 °F) when using the projector at elevations lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level, and between 0 °C (32 °F) and 35 °C (95 °F) when using the projector at high altitudes. If you use the Smoke cut filter together, the operating environment temperature should be between 0 °C (32 °F) and 30 °C (86 °F).

If the [LAMP SELECT] menu is set to [DUAL], and [LAMP POWER] is set to [HIGH], [MIDDLE], or [NORMAL], and an ambient temperature reaches

40 °C (104 °F) or higher (35 °C (95 °F) or higher when [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] is set to [ON] or the Smoke cut filter is used), the light output may decrease by approx. 20 % to protect the projector.

180 - ENGLISH

Chapter 6 Appendix — Specifications r

Applicable scanning frequency

Refer to “List of compatible signals” (x page 175) for the types of video signals that can be used with the projector.

For video signal

(including Y/C signal)

For RGB signal

For YC

B

C

R

/YP

For SDI signal

B

P

For DVI-D signal

For HDMI signal

R

signal

(Only for PT-DZ13KU,

PT-DS12KU, PT-DZ10KU)

Horizontal: 15.75 kHz/15.63 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz/60 Hz

Horizontal: 15 kHz to 100 kHz, Vertical: 24 Hz to 120 Hz

PIAS (Panasonic Intelligent Auto Scanning) system f Dot clock frequency: 162 MHz or less f 525i (480i)

Horizontal: 15.75 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz f 525p (480p)

Horizontal: 31.5 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz f 750 (720)/60p

Horizontal: 45 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz f 1125 (1035)/60i

Horizontal: 33.75 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz f 1125 (1080)/50i

Horizontal: 28.13 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz f 1125 (1080)/24sF

Horizontal: 27 kHz, Vertical: 48 Hz f 1125 (1080)/30p


Horizontal: 56.25 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz f 625i (576i)

Horizontal: 15.63 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz f 625p (576p)


Horizontal: 37.5 kHz, Vertical: 50 Hz f 1125 (1080)/60i


Horizontal: 27 kHz, Vertical: 24 Hz f 1125 (1080)/25p


Horizontal: 67.5 kHz, Vertical: 60 Hz f The SYNC/HD and VD terminals do not support 3 value SYNC.

525p (480p), 625p (576p), 750 (720)/60p, 750 (720)/50p,

1125 (1080)/60i, 1125 (1080)/50i, 1125 (1080)/24p,

1125 (1080)/24sF, 1125 (1080)/25p, 1125 (1080)/30p,

1125 (1080)/60p, 1125 (1080)/50p f Displayable resolution: VGA to WUXGA (non-interlaced) f Dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz

525p (480p), 625p (576p), 750 (720)/60p, 750 (720)/50p,

1125 (1080)/60i, 1125 (1080)/50i, 1125 (1080)/24p,

1125 (1080)/24sF, 1125 (1080)/25p, 1125 (1080)/30p,

1125 (1080)/60p, 1125 (1080)/50p f Displayable resolution: VGA to WUXGA (non-interlaced) f Dot clock frequency: 25 MHz to 162 MHz

SD-SDI signal

Single link HD-SDI signal

Dual link HD-SDI signal *1

SMPTE ST 259 compliant

YC

B

C

R

4:2:2 10-bit

480i, 576i


YP

B

P

R

4:2:2 10-bit

720/50p, 720/60p, 1035/60i, 1080/50i, 1080/60i, 1080/25p,

1080/24p, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p


RGB 4:4:4 12-bit/10-bit

1080/50i, 1080/60i, 1080/25p, 1080/24p, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p

X'Y'Z' 4:4:4 12-bit

2048 x 1080/24p, 2048 x 1080/24sF

3G-SDI signal SMPTE ST 424 compliant

YP

B

P

R

4:2:2 10-bit

1080/50p, 1080/60p

RGB 4:4:4 12-bit/10-bit

1080/50i, 1080/60i, 1080/25p, 1080/24p, 1080/24sF, 1080/30p f The 3G-SDI signal is only compatible with SDI1.


ENGLISH - 181

Chapter 6 Appendix — Specifications r

Terminal

<RGB 1 IN> terminal

<RGB 2 IN> terminal

<DVI-D IN> terminal

<HDMI IN> terminal

<VIDEO IN> terminal

<SDI IN 1> terminal (Only for

PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU)

<SDI IN> terminal (Only for

PT-DZ10KU)

<SDI IN 2> terminal


PT-DS12KU)

<3D SYNC 1 IN/OUT> terminal


PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU)

<3D SYNC 2 OUT> terminal


PT-DS12KU, PT-DW11KU)

<SERIAL IN>/ <SERIAL OUT> terminal

<REMOTE 1 IN>/ <REMOTE 1

OUT> terminal

<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal

<LAN> terminal

1 set (BNC x 5 (RGB/YP

B

P

R

/YC

B

C

R

/YC x 1))

RGB signal 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)

SYNC/HD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative polarity compatible

VD

YP

B

P

R

signal

Y/C signal

Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, P

Y: 1.0 V [p-p], C: 0.286 V [p-p] 75 Ω

B

P

R

: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω

1 set, high-density D-Sub 15 p (female)

RGB signal 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω (SYNC ON GREEN: 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω)

SYNC/HD TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative polarity compatible

VD

TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative polarity compatible

TTL high impedance, automatic positive/negative polarity compatible

YP

B

P

R

signal Y: 1.0 V [p-p] including synchronization signal, P

1 set, DVI-D 24 p, single link, DVI 1.0 compliant, HDCP compatible

1 set, HDMI 19 pin, HDCP compatible, Deep Color compatible

B

P

R

: 0.7 V [p-p] 75 Ω

1 set, BNC 1.0 V [p-p] 75 Ω

1 set (BNC)

SD-SDI signal

HD-SDI signal

3G-SDI signal

Dual link HD-SDI

(LINK-A) signal *1

1 set (BNC)

SD-SDI signal

HD-SDI signal

Dual link HD-SDI

(LINK-B) signal

1 set (BNC)








During input setting

During output setting

1 set (BNC)

TTL high impedance

TTL output: Maximum 10 mA

TTL output: Maximum 10 mA

D-Sub 9 p, 1 set each, RS-232C compliant, for computer control

M3 stereo mini jack cable, 1 set each, for remote control (wired)/projector connection control

1 set, D-Sub 9 p, for contact control

1 set, RJ-45, for network connection, PJLink compatible, 10Base-T/100Base-TX


Note f The model numbers of accessories and optional components are subject to change without prior notice.

182 - ENGLISH

Dimensions

Unit: mm

Chapter 6 Appendix — Dimensions

462 (18-3/16")

530 (20-7/8")

* Actual dimensions may differ depending on the product.

26 (1-1/32")

468 (18-7/16")

ENGLISH - 183

Chapter 6 Appendix — Precautions for Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors

Precautions for Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors

f When installing the projector to a ceiling, be sure to use the specified optional Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors (Model No.:

ET-PKD310H (for High Ceilings), ET-PKD310S (for Low Ceilings), ET-PAD310 (Projector ceiling mount bracket)).

f When installing the projector, attach the drop-prevention kit included with the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors.

f Ask a qualified technician to do the installation work such as mounting the projector on the ceiling.

f Panasonic takes no responsibility for any damage to the projector resulting from use of a ceiling mount bracket not manufactured by

Panasonic or the inappropriate choice of location for installation, even if the warranty period of the projector has not expired.

f Unused products must be removed promptly by a qualified technician.

f Use a torque screwdriver or Allen torque wrench to tighten bolts to their specified tightening torques. Do not use electric screwdrivers or impact screwdrivers.

f Read the Installation Instructions for the Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors for details.

f The model numbers of accessories and optional accessories are subject to change without prior notice.

Bottom view

Model No. of Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors: ET-PKD310H (for High Ceilings)

ET-PKD310S (for Low Ceilings)

ET-PAD310 (Projector ceiling mount bracket)

Torque: 4 ± 0.5 N·m

M6

16 mm (5/8")

184 - ENGLISH

Index

Index

0 – 9

[3D FRAME DELAY]

[3D INPUT FORMAT]

[3D PICTURE BALANCE]

[3D SIMUL INPUT SETTING]

[3D SYNC SETTING]

A

<AC IN> terminal

Adjusting adjustable feet

[ADVANCED MENU]

Air filter unit compartment

<ASPECT> button

Aspect function

Attaching/removing the projection lens

Automatic setup function

<AUTO SETUP> button

B

C

D

E

F

20

157

79

24, 63

98

Projector body

Remote control

98

103

G

H

K

M

N

O

P

100

109

24, 28

R

Remote control

124

S

T

159

Replacing the lamp unit

Initial setting

86

Installation mode

97

Replacing the air filter unit

<RGB1> button

Projector body

[LEFT/RIGHT SWAP]

128

Remote control

Renaming the registered signal

[INPUT RESOLUTION]

24, 62

[AUTO SIGNAL]

72

111

[FREEZE]

<FUNC> button

24, 63

63

121

74

81

26, 62

31

Projectors

16

Projecting

[PROJECTION METHOD]

Projector body

108

[PROJECTOR SETUP]

129

Read this first!

Remote control

120

61

66

24, 62

Remote control

[LAMP RELAY]

[BLANKING]

24, 56

155

111

109

25

[LARGE SCREEN CORRECTION]

93

<LOCK> button

24

<RGB2> button

89

<REMOTE 1 IN> terminal

<REMOTE 1 OUT> terminal

<REMOTE 2 IN> terminal

[REMOTE2 MODE]

26, 62

Remote control

Projector body

[LAMP POWER]

<LENS> button

[SAVE ALL USER DATA]

[SCHEDULE]

Projector body

Cautions when installing

Cautions when transporting

Ceiling Mount Bracket for Projectors

Filter indicator

2

99

118, 169

95

97

<SDI 1/2> button

Projector body

Remote control

Remote control

[CLOCK PHASE]

[COLOR]

[COLOR MATCHING]

[COLOR TEMPERATURE]

Connecting the power cord

Connecting to the projector with a cable

Connection

[CONTRAST]

[CONTROL DEVICE PASSWORD CHANGE] 133

<MENU> button

[COOLING CONDITION]

[CUT OFF]

<DEFAULT> button

<FOCUS> button

93

95

91

[3D TEST MODE]

95

18

86

132

136, 151

107

122

175

124

66

26, 53

157

26, 65

24, 65

67

26, 62

24, 62

100

Security

[SECURITY]

[SECURITY PASSWORD]

131

Selecting the input signal

169

<SERIAL OUT> terminal

Setting up

79

<SHIFT> button

24, 56

[NETWORK SETUP]

[NOISE REDUCTION]

[DISPLAY OPTION]

<DVI-D> button

68, 96

Projector body

[DYNAMIC IRIS]

<ENTER> button

94

121

26

Remote control

129

[NETWORK]

Network connections

Remote control

128

[DIGITAL CINEMA REALITY]

Dimensions

Display language

[DISPLAY SETTING]

18

100

76

24

<ON SCREEN> button

Expanding signal lock-in range

65

135

76

120

102

67, 71

<SHUTTER> button

124

75

Projector body

<STATUS> button

Remote control

Optional accessories

[PICTURE MODE]

[P IN P]

24, 61

180

78

[STANDBY MODE]

[STARTUP INPUT SELECT]

[STARTUP LOGO]

Remote control

[ON-SCREEN DISPLAY]

Remote control

[DVI-D IN]

[EDGE BLENDING]

65

21

69, 125

125

[SYSTEM DAYLIGHT VIEW]

[SYSTEM SELECTOR]

[POSITION]

52

69, 128

119

24, 62

Sub memory

Switching off the projector

Switching on the projector

Power indicator

Power on button

[FRAME LOCK]

88

Power standby button

52

26

24

26

24

62

77

Temperature indicator

<TEST> button

24, 63

69, 127

132

[TINT]

Troubleshooting

Remote control

174

ENGLISH - 185

Index

U

104

175

V

<VIDEO> button

26, 62

Remote control

W

Z

[ZOOM]

<ZOOM> button

186 - ENGLISH

Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union

These symbols are only valid in the European Union.

If you wish to discard this product, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.

Environment care information for users in China

This symbol is only valid in China.

Panasonic Corporation

Web Site : http://panasonic.net/avc/projector/

© Panasonic Corporation 2013

Panasonic System Communications Company of North America

One Panasonic Way 2F-13, Secaucus, NJ 07094

TEL: (877) 803 - 8492

Panasonic Canada Inc.

5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3

TEL: (905) 624 - 5010

W0513HM0 -YI

Panasonic PT-DZ13KU Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions

Functional Manual

DLP

TM

Projector Commercial Use

Model No.

■ Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual

■ Before using your projector, be sure to read “Read this first!” (x pages 2 to 9).

Read this first!

FCC NOTICE (USA)

NOTIFICATION (Canada)

For USA-California Only

WARNING:

POWER

ON USE/INSTALLATION

WARNING:

WARNING:

ACCESSORIES

CAUTION:

POWER

ON USE/INSTALLATION

ACCESSORIES

CAUTION:

MAINTENANCE

VIEWING 3D VIDEO (PT-DZ13KU, PT-DS12KU, and PT-DW11KU only)

Brazil Only

Brasil Apenas

Manuseio de baterias usadas

BRASIL

Remoção das baterias

1. Pressione a guia e levante a tampa.

2. Remova as baterias.

Trademarks

Illustrations in this manual

Reference pages

Term

Features of the Projector Quick Steps

High luminance and high color reproduction

1. Set up the projector.

(x page 31)

2. Attach the projection lens

(optional).

(x page 46)

Easy setup and improved serviceability

3. Connect with external devices.

(x page 48)

4. Connect the power cord.

(x page 52)

Improved cost performance in maintenance fee

5. Switch on the projector.

(x page 53)

6. Make initial settings.

(x page 22)

7. Select the input signal.

(x page 56)

8. Adjust the image.

(x page 56)

Contents

Chapter 1 Preparation

Chapter 4 Settings

Chapter 2 Getting Started

Chapter 3 Basic Operations

Chapter 5 Maintenance

Chapter 6 Appendix

Chapter 1 Preparation

Precautions for use

Cautions when transporting

Cautions when installing

After removing the projection lens (optional), attach the dust sponge included with the projector.

Do not set up the projector outdoors.

Do not set up the projector in the following locations.

Be sure to ask a specialized technician or your dealer when installing the projector on a ceiling.

Lens focus

Make sure to set [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] to [ON] when using the projector at elevations between 1 400 m (4 593') or higher and lower than 2 700 m (8 858') above sea level.

Make sure to set [HIGH ALTITUDE MODE] to [OFF] when using the projector at elevations lower than 1 400 m (4 593') above sea level.

Do not install the projector at elevations of 2 700 m (8 858') or higher above sea level.

Do not use the projector tilted to the right or left.

When installing and using the projector at an angle that exceeds 30° vertically, set

[COOLING CONDITION] (x page 109).